BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

364

Transcript of BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

Page 1: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0
Page 2: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE i REV 1.0

Acknowledgments

The AVID team wishes to express our gratitude of our OPDS RAY team colleagues in DILG’s Central Office as well as the pioneers of BBB in the Philippines, the staff of the DILG Region VIII office in Tacloban, Leyte, and Yolanda affected LGUs in Region’s VI and VIII, in working with us to produce this operations manual.

Revisions

Revision Number & Date Comment

Rev 1.0; June 22, 2015 AVID Final Draft for Release to Pilot LGUs In Region VIII, handover to DILG C.O. for development, and review & information of DILG Region VI, Region VII, LGA & other interested parties.

Authors

AVID Team Member Role

Breanna Ryan Architect & Sustainable Design Officer

Celeste Swain Civil Engineer and Region 8 Program Coordinator

Chay Garde Urban & Environmental Planner

Jonathan Choy Mechanical Engineer & Project Management Officer

Sonja Bertotto National Program Coordinator

Other contributors

The AVID team recognizes and appreciates the time committed by our DILG colleagues, particularly the open manner in which materials proposed by the AVID team were reviewed and workshopped. Contributors at all workshops are gratefully acknowledged

The AVID team recognizes the contribution of Tristan Turner - Construction Manager, AVID

Page 3: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE ii REV 1.0

Table of Contents ACRONYMS .................................................................................................................................... VII

DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................. VIII

TABLE OF FIGURES ............................................................................................................................ X

OVERVIEW AND KEY BBB CONCEPTS ................................................................................................. 2

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 2 THE AVID AND DILG PARTNERSHIP FOR BBB ................................................................................................... 2 PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................................ 3

Observations ........................................................................................................................................ 4 WHAT IS BBB AND WHY IS IT IMPORTANT? ...................................................................................................... 5 WHAT IS RESILIENT INFRASTRUCTURE? ............................................................................................................ 7

Planning for resilient infrastructure .................................................................................................. 10 Principles of achieving resilient infrastructure .................................................................................. 10

KEY CONCEPTS TO BBB ................................................................................................................... 11 USING A PROJECT MANAGEMENT APPROACH TO ACHIEVING BBB - AN OVERVIEW ............................................... 11 PROJECT MANAGEMENT – THE BBB QUALITY TRIANGLE .................................................................................. 15 CLIMATE CHANGE AND THE ‘NEW NORMAL’ ................................................................................................... 16 THE ROLE OF URBAN/ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING TOWARDS ACHIEVING BBB ..................................................... 17

MODULE 1: PRE & POST EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE ASSESSMENT PROJECT STAGE: INITIATION ......... 19

MODULE OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................... 21

PRE-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE PREPARATION – EARLY PREPARATIONS ............................................. 22 BASELINE DATA COLLECTION ........................................................................................................................ 23 STRATEGIC LAND USE PLANNING IN INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING ...................................................................... 30

Updates to CLUPs .............................................................................................................................. 30

PRE-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE PREPARATION – CRITICAL PREPAREDNESS ACTIONS .......................... 33 SITE SAFETY WALKS .................................................................................................................................... 33 PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT & INFORMATION .............................................................................................. 38

POST-EVENT INFORMATION GATHERING ........................................................................................ 40 PRELIMINARY POST-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE ASSESSMENT ............................................................................... 40

Recommendations for Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Reporting in LISTO ..................................... 40 Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment and the PDNA .................................................... 43

DETAILED POST-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE DAMAGE INSPECTION ........................................................................ 46 LONG TERM PLANNING ASSESSMENT ............................................................................................................ 78

MODULE 1 FINALIZATION ............................................................................................................... 79 DILG VERIFICATION OF THE DETAILED POST-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE DAMAGE INSPECTION .................................. 79

MODULE 2: BBB PROJECT SCOPE PROJECT STAGE: PLANNING AND DESIGN ...................................... 84

MODULE OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................... 86

DESIGN CRITERIA ............................................................................................................................ 87 BASIC INFO ............................................................................................................................................... 87 LAND USE PLANNING & ANALYSIS TO BBB ...................................................................................................... 87

Tools for land use analysis and information ...................................................................................... 88 The role of the DILG and LGU in strategic land use & Infra planning ................................................ 89 Tools for Community-Based hazard analysis ..................................................................................... 90

Page 4: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE iii REV 1.0

Strategic environmental and watershed planning to BBB ................................................................ 94 Site Level planning ............................................................................................................................. 97 Urban Design to BBB ......................................................................................................................... 98 Locational Clearances can be linked to design requirements to ensure BBB .................................. 104 Defining Policy Options for Climate Change Adaptation and Disaster Risk Reduction in the CLUP/ Zoning Ordinance ............................................................................................................................ 105

ANALYSIS OF FUNCTIONALITY & PERFORMANCE TO BBB ................................................................................ 106 Community Needs............................................................................................................................ 106 Compliance Requirements ............................................................................................................... 111

GENDER EQUALITY ................................................................................................................................... 119 BBB Sustainable Environmental Design ........................................................................................... 121

THE TERM ‘SUSTAINABILITY’ ...................................................................................................................... 121 CURVED ROOF ......................................................................................................................................... 125 ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................................... 139

Damage Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 139

CONCEPT DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................... 151 CONCEPT DESIGN OF NEW ELEMENTS ......................................................................................................... 151

Considerations for Design of Roofing .............................................................................................. 153 Considerations for Structural Frame Design .................................................................................... 158 Considerations for Design of Openings ........................................................................................... 158 Considerations for Design of Services .............................................................................................. 160 Considerations for Design of Groundworks ..................................................................................... 160 Considerations for Design of Internals ............................................................................................ 161 Concept Design Decisions Form ....................................................................................................... 162 Drawing List ..................................................................................................................................... 162 Titleblock Elements .......................................................................................................................... 162 Drawing Content.............................................................................................................................. 164

BBB PROJECT SCOPE FINALIZATION ............................................................................................................ 168

MODULE 3: BBB DETAILED DESIGN, DOCUMENTATION DEVELOPMENT AND VERIFICATION PROJECT STAGE: PLANNING AND DESIGN .................................................................................................... 171

DETAILED DESIGN AND CONFIRMATION OF SCOPE ITEMS.............................................................. 173 INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION ................................................................................................................ 173 DETAILED DESIGN .................................................................................................................................... 174

Structural Frame Considerations ..................................................................................................... 176 Connection and fixing considerations .............................................................................................. 178 Considerations for CHB .................................................................................................................... 185 Material Selection Considerations ................................................................................................... 187 Considerations for Services .............................................................................................................. 188 Considerations for Internals ............................................................................................................ 188 Considerations for Ramps and Stairs ............................................................................................... 191

SCOPE CONFIRMATION ............................................................................................................................. 191

DOCUMENTATION DEVELOPMENT ................................................................................................ 192 INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION ................................................................................................................ 192 POW ..................................................................................................................................................... 193 DETAILED DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................... 194 BOQ/DETAILED ESTIMATE ........................................................................................................................ 205 SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................................... 207 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................... 210

FINALIZATION OF DOCUMENTATION ............................................................................................ 212

Page 5: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE iv REV 1.0

INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION ................................................................................................................ 212 INTERNAL LGU VERIFICATION FORM ........................................................................................................... 213 EXISTING DILG VERIFICATION FORM ........................................................................................................... 215

MODULE 4: BBB CONSTRUCTION AND QUALITY PROJECT STAGE: IMPLEMENTATION ................... 216

BBB PRE-CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................................. 218 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 218 BBB QUALITY IN CONSTRUCTION................................................................................................................ 219

Quality Triangle ............................................................................................................................... 219 BBB Quality Control in Construction ................................................................................................ 220

SCHEDULING STRATEGIES .......................................................................................................................... 221 Sub-Project Construction Schedule .................................................................................................. 221 Scheduling Across Multiple Sites ..................................................................................................... 224

RISK MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................... 225 PROJECT CONTROL DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................ 227 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH .......................................................................................................... 233 PROJECT MONITORING ............................................................................................................................. 243

Statement of Work Accomplished ................................................................................................... 243 Program of Works ........................................................................................................................... 244 Construction Schedule and S-Curve ................................................................................................. 244 Working Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 245 Questioning Infrastructure Flowchart – Project Verification ........................................................... 245

BBB QUALITY INSPECTION PROCESS .............................................................................................. 248 BBB QUALITY INSPECTION FORMS AND CHECKLISTS ...................................................................................... 249 SITE INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 253

The Site Inspector’s Role .................................................................................................................. 253 Field Officers and the BBB Inspection Process ................................................................................. 254 Questioning Infrastructure Flowchart – Site Inspection .................................................................. 254

BBB CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS & METHOD ................................................................................ 256 SITE MOBILIZATION .................................................................................................................................. 256 DEMOLITION AND GROUNDWORKS ............................................................................................................. 257

Demolition ....................................................................................................................................... 257 Site Stake out ................................................................................................................................... 257 Clearing and Grubbing ..................................................................................................................... 257 Construction Layout ......................................................................................................................... 257 Excavation ....................................................................................................................................... 258 Shoring ............................................................................................................................................. 259 Soil Poisoning ................................................................................................................................... 260 Dewatering ...................................................................................................................................... 260

FOUNDATION AND SLAB ON GRADE WORKS ................................................................................................. 260 STEEL REINFORCING BARS ......................................................................................................................... 265

Product Identification ...................................................................................................................... 265 Storage ............................................................................................................................................ 266 Preparation ...................................................................................................................................... 266 Rebar Arrangements and Placement .............................................................................................. 266 Rebar Wires ..................................................................................................................................... 268 Splicing Arrangements ..................................................................................................................... 270 Splice Locations for Continuous Beams ........................................................................................... 271 Splice Locations for Cantilever Beams ............................................................................................. 272 Beam to Column Connection Detail ................................................................................................. 273

Page 6: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE v REV 1.0

Splice Locations for Columns ........................................................................................................... 274 FORMWORK ............................................................................................................................................ 276

Formwork for Columns .................................................................................................................... 277 Formwork and Re-bar Placement Problems .................................................................................... 278

CONCRETE .............................................................................................................................................. 279 Achieving Quality Concrete ............................................................................................................. 279 Quality Materials - Cement ............................................................................................................. 280 Quality Materials - Aggregate ......................................................................................................... 281 Quality Materials - Water ................................................................................................................ 282 Proportions and Mixing ................................................................................................................... 283 Concrete Testing .............................................................................................................................. 285 Concrete Placement ......................................................................................................................... 287 Curing .............................................................................................................................................. 288 Screeding and Finishing of Slabs ...................................................................................................... 288 Removal of Formwork ..................................................................................................................... 288 Concrete Construction Problems ..................................................................................................... 289

MASONRY .............................................................................................................................................. 294 STEEL TRUSS FABRICATION ........................................................................................................................ 299

Truss Fabrication ............................................................................................................................. 299 WELDING ............................................................................................................................................... 301

Welding Techniques ......................................................................................................................... 302 Weld Defect Identification and Rectification ................................................................................... 306 Weld Test ......................................................................................................................................... 308 Welding Problems ............................................................................................................................ 309

TRUSS AND ROOFING INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 311 Column to Truss Connections .......................................................................................................... 311 Truss Connection Problems.............................................................................................................. 312 Truss Installation ............................................................................................................................. 313 Purlin and Roof System .................................................................................................................... 314

TIMBER .................................................................................................................................................. 318 MODULE 4 FINALIZATION AND BBB COMPLIANCE ......................................................................................... 319

MODULE 4 FINALIZATION AND BBB COMPLIANCE ......................................................................... 320

CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION ...................................................................................................... 322

PROJECT CLOSING......................................................................................................................... 324

CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE.............................................................................................. 325

DEVELOPING A MAINTENANCE PLAN ............................................................................................ 325

BBB LESSONS LEARNT ................................................................................................................... 326

REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 327

MODULE 1 – PRE AND POST EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE ASSESSMENT .............................................. 327

MODULE 2 – BBB PROJECT SCOPE ................................................................................................. 327

MODULE 3 – BBB DETAILED DESIGN, DOCUMENTATION, DEVELOPMENT AND VERIFICATION ......... 328

MODULE 4 – BBB CONSTRUCTION AND QUALITY ........................................................................... 328

APPENDICES ...................................................................................................................................... I

APPENDIX A. OTHER INFORMATION SOURCES FOR USEFUL BASELINE DATA .................................. I

APPENDIX B. BACKGROUND INFORMATION ON THE PDNA ......................................................... IX

Page 7: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE vi REV 1.0

APPENDIX C. LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE AUDIT FORM AND INSTRUCTIONAL GUIDE FOR BUILDINGS XII

APPENDIX D. JICA REFERENCES .................................................................................................. XII

APPENDIX E. STRUCTURAL FRAME DESIGN CALCULATIONS ........................................................ XII

APPENDIX F. BOLTED CONNECTION DESIGN CALCULATIONS ..................................................... XIII

APPENDIX G. RAMP DESIGN CALCULATIONS ............................................................................. XIII

APPENDIX H. ASSURE DRAWINGS ............................................................................................. XIII

APPENDIX I. NHA DRAWINGS .................................................................................................. XIII

APPENDIX J. EXAMPLE DETAILED ESTIMATE ............................................................................. XIV

APPENDIX K. EXAMPLE TESTING REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................... XIV

APPENDIX L. RISK MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION ................................................................ XV

Page 8: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE vii REV 1.0

Acronyms Alliance for Safe and Sustainable Reconstruction ASSURE American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM

Australian Volunteers for International Development AVID

Bill of Quantities BoQ

Build Back Better BBB

Central Office (of DILG) CO

Climate Change Adaptation CCA

Comprehensive Development Plan CDP

Comprehensive Land Use Plan CLUP

Department of Interior and Local Government DILG

Department of Labor and Employment DOLE

Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Internationale Zumammenarbeit (German International Aid) GIZ

Disaster Risk Reduction DRR

Extension of Time EOT

Japan International Cooperation Agency JICA

Local Government Unit LGU

Millennium Development Goals MDG’s

Municipal Local Government Operations Officer MLGOO

Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications for Public Buildings MPSSPB

Office of Project Development Services OPDS

Office of the Presidential Assistant for Rehabilitation and Recovery OPARR

Program of Works POW

Project Development Management Unit PDMU

Project Management Office PMO

Recovery Assistance on Yolanda RAY

Regional Office RO

Statement of Work Accomplished SWA

Sustainable Development Goals SDG’s

Page 9: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE viii REV 1.0

Definitions Beam - a horizontal structural member transversely supporting a load. A structural member carrying loads (weight) from one support to another which is sometimes called “girder”

Buckle - to bend, heave, warp, or kink usually under the influence of local stress

Cladding - is the covering of one material with another

Climate Change - change of climate that is attributed directly or indirectly to human activity that alters the composition of the global atmosphere and which is in addition to natural climate variability observed over comparable time periods.

Climate Change Adaptation - Adjustment in natural or human systems in response to actual or expected climatic stimuli or their effects, which moderates harm or exploits beneficial opportunities.

Column - a vertical support (square, rectangular or cylindrical) used for supporting main loads

Disaster Risk Reduction - The concept and practice of reducing disaster risks through systematic efforts to analyze and manage the causal factors of disasters, including through reduced exposure to hazards, lessened vulnerability of people and property, wise management of land and the environment, and improved preparedness for adverse events.

Hogging - describes the shape of a beam or similar long object when loading is applied. Hogging describes a beam which curves upwards in the middle. See also sagging

Load - A type of force which acts on a building or some element of the building. Dead loads consist of the weight of the building elements that a structure must support. The roof, for example, is a dead load. Live loads are other additional forces which act on a building. People using a building are considered live loads. The forces on a building caused by wind, water and ground shaking are also examples of live loads

Parapet - wall-like barrier at the edge of a roof, terrace, balcony or other structure. Where extending above a roof, it may simply be the portion of an exterior wall that continues above the line of the roof surface, or may be a continuation of a vertical feature beneath the roof such as a fire wall or party wall. They are primarily used to prevent the spread of fires.

Reinforced concrete - concrete in which reinforcement bars ("rebars"), reinforcement grids, plates or fibers have been incorporated to strengthen the concrete in tension.

Reinforced masonry - Masonry in which reinforcement is embedded such that the component materials act together with the masonry units in resisting forces. Reinforced Grouted Masonry and Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry are sub-heads that are sometimes used.

Resilience – the ability of a system, community or society exposed to hazards to resist, absorb, accommodate and recover from the effects of a hazard in a timely and efficient manner, including through the preservation and restoration of its essential basic structures and functions. (RA 10121)

Sagging - describes the shape of a beam or similar long object when loading is applied. Sagging describes a beam which curves downwards in the middle – see also Hogging

Page 10: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE ix REV 1.0

Urban Planning - Planning is the process of making decisions to guide future action. The planning profession (which is also referred to as ‘urban planning’, ‘land-use planning’ or ‘environmental planning’) is specifically concerned with shaping cities, towns and regions by managing development, infrastructure and services.

Window shutter - a solid and stable window covering usually consisting of a frame of vertical stiles and horizontal rails (top, center and bottom). Set within this frame can be louvers (both operable or fixed, horizontal or vertical), solid panels, fabric, glass and most any other item that can be mounted within a frame.

Page 11: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE x REV 1.0

TABLE OF FIGURES Figure 1 Outline of Build Back Better .......................................................................................................... 5

Figure 2 Principles of Resilience, ARUP (2014) ............................................................................................ 7

Figure 3 Poblacion Daabantayan, Cebu (Engr. Shyrrah Faye V Elizaga, 2014) ............................................ 9

Figure 4 Totally destroyed building in Region 8 (DILG, 2014) ..................................................................... 9

Figure 5 Table of Principles to achieve resilient infrastructure ................................................................. 10

Figure 6 Community Garden in Quezon City - an example of resilient infrastructure provision providing for both social and economic needs ......................................................................................................... 11

Figure 7 Project Management Principles .................................................................................................. 12

Figure 10 Project Management cartoon – project need vs what is delivered .......................................... 12

Figure 8 Key project management stages ................................................................................................. 13

Figure 11 the 'BBB' quality triangle ........................................................................................................... 16

Figure 12 Urban Planning has had a long history in the Philippines - Image shows proposed plan for Quezon City in the 1950's .......................................................................................................................... 18

Figure 13 LISTO (LGA DILG, 2015).............................................................................................................. 23

Figure 14 Hazard information sources, HLURB 2014 ................................................................................ 25

Figure 15 CLUP Guidebook ........................................................................................................................ 26

Figure 16 LISTO (LGA DILG, 2015).............................................................................................................. 30

Figure 17 Photograph demonstrating extent of storm surge damage in a Yolanda affected community at a wider strategic planning level ................................................................................................................. 31

Figure 18 Hazard Maps can be updated for improved decision making only if accurate information and data is collected and recorded .................................................................................................................. 31

Figure 19 Example of using flooding data to map alongside geographic and political data to better understand the impacts on the community, NEDA .................................................................................. 32

Figure 20 Debris cleared from road to facilitate the normalization of moving around the city of Tacloban, Leyte, After Typhoon Yolanda .................................................................................................. 78

Figure 21 UN Habitat's land use planning cycle, 2014 .............................................................................. 88

Figure 22 A simple analytical tool for planning for infrastructure, CSIRO 2015 ....................................... 89

Figure 23 The new CLUP guidelines promote the total watershed management approach to planning . 95

Figure 24 Demonstrates overlapping watersheds (HLURB, 2015) ............................................................ 96

Figure 25 Sustainable Transport options - E-Jeepney, Tacloban City........................................................ 96

Figure 26 Reconstruction of a Church building after Yolanda................................................................. 105

Figure 27 Identifying Beauty Tool ........................................................................................................... 107

Figure 28 Stakeholder Mapping Tool ...................................................................................................... 108

Figure 29 The Power of 10 Tool ............................................................................................................... 109

Page 12: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE xi REV 1.0

Figure 30 Collaborative Design Workshop .............................................................................................. 110

Figure 31 Be Honest Mural (Brotherhood of Christian Businessmen and Professionals) ....................... 111

Figure 32 Ramp Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 112

Figure 33 Handrail Dimensions................................................................................................................ 112

Figure 34 Ramp Curbs and Traffic ........................................................................................................... 113

Figure 35 Toilet Requirements for Municipal Buildings .......................................................................... 114

Figure 36 Minimum Toilet Stall Dimensions............................................................................................ 115

Figure 37 PWD Toilet and Grab Rail Dimensions .................................................................................... 115

Figure 38 PWD Toilet and Grab Rail Dimensions cont’d ......................................................................... 116

Figure 39 PWD Toilet & Grab Rail Dimensions cont'd ............................................................................. 116

Figure 40 PWD Toilet & Grab Rail Dimensions cont'd ............................................................................. 116

Figure 41 VAW Desk Poster ..................................................................................................................... 117

Figure 42 Breastfeeding Room Sign Figure 43 Baby Change Table ...................................................... 118

Figure 44 Gender Equality ....................................................................................................................... 119

Figure 45 Understanding Environmental Sustainability .......................................................................... 121

Figure 46 Environmental Sustainability Strategies .................................................................................. 122

Figure 47 Capturing Cooling Breezes ....................................................................................................... 124

Figure 48 Graph of Thermal Mass of Different Materials ....................................................................... 125

Figure 49 Thermal Mass Day and Night .................................................................................................. 126

Figure 50 Heat Gain without Insulation .................................................................................................. 127

Figure 51 Heat Radiation ......................................................................................................................... 128

Figure 52 Shading To Reduce Heat Gain ................................................................................................. 128

Figure 53 Fly Roof & Ventilation .............................................................................................................. 129

Figure 54 Strategies for Good Orientation .............................................................................................. 130

Figure 55 Strategies for Good Orientation in Plan .................................................................................. 131

Figure 56 The components of a rainwater harvesting system ................................................................ 132

Figure 57 Charged Line System ............................................................................................................... 133

Figure 58 Benefits of Solar Power ........................................................................................................... 134

Figure 59 Council House 2 Facades ......................................................................................................... 135

Figure 60 Carbon Positive, Neutral and Negative Equations .................................................................. 136

Figure 61 Steps to Creating Carbon Zero Buildings ................................................................................. 137

Figure 62 Improper Structural Design in Municipal Building of Sagbayan, Bohol .................................. 140

Figure 63 Improper Design and/or Construction in Tanauan National High School, Leyte .................... 141

Figure 64 Improper Design and/or Construction in Tanauan National High School, Leyte .................... 141

Figure 65 Timber failure to due to inadequate design Multi-purpose Hall, Tabon-Tabon, Leyte ........... 142

Figure 66 Purlin to Roof sheeting connection failure at Public Market, Tabon-tabon, Leyte.................. 142

Page 13: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE xii REV 1.0

Figure 67 Excerpt from NSCP Timber Chapter ........................................................................................ 153

Figure 68 Visualization of Curved Roof Source: ASSURE, 2014 .............................................................. 153

Figure 69 Detailed Section of Curved Roof with Parapets ...................................................................... 154

Figure 70 Common Roof Shapes ............................................................................................................. 155

Figure 71 Buildings with and without eaves ........................................................................................... 155

Figure 72 Guttering and Drain Pipes ....................................................................................................... 156

Figure 73 Simple Fascia Board ................................................................................................................. 156

Figure 74 Detachable Window Shutters .................................................................................................. 159

Figure 75 Permanent Window Shutters - Roller Shutters ....................................................................... 159

Figure 76 Example Titleblock 1 ................................................................................................................ 163

Figure 77 Example Titleblock 2 ................................................................................................................ 164

Figure 78 Example Concept Municipality Plan ........................................................................................ 165

Figure 79 Example Concept Proposed Floor Plans .................................................................................. 166

Figure 80 Example Concept Proposed Elevation ..................................................................................... 167

Figure 81 Tabon-Tabon Gym/Multipurpose Centre ................................................................................ 174

Figure 82 Framing and Bracing for Steel and Timber Truss and Column combinations ......................... 176

Figure 83 General Macarthur Civic Centre .............................................................................................. 177

Figure 84 2-Storey Prototype Barangay Hall ........................................................................................... 177

Figure 85 Suggested corrugated roof sheet overlap dimensions............................................................ 178

Figure 86 Innovative BBB fixing arrangement for timber purlin to roof sheet- Guiuan Wet Market ..... 180

Figure 87 J-bolt and Purlin Arrangement ................................................................................................ 180

Figure 88 Roofing edging detail ............................................................................................................... 180

Figure 89 Timber Purlin to Rafter bolted cleat arrangement at Wet Market, Guiuan............................ 181

Figure 90 Gusset plates vs direct welding ............................................................................................... 182

Figure 91 Fully welded gusset plate (from below) .................................................................................. 182

Figure 92 Fully welded gusset plates ....................................................................................................... 182

Figure 93 Bolted timber gusset plate detail from Wet Market, Guiuan Source: DILG, 2015 ................. 183

Figure 94 Timber Connections to Concrete............................................................................................. 184

Figure 95 Reinforcing details required around openings ........................................................................ 185

Figure 96 CHB end wall reinforced concrete support beams and columns ............................................ 185

Figure 97 CHB tie-bar requirements ........................................................................................................ 186

Figure 98 Example ceiling fixing solution ................................................................................................ 190

Figure 99 Breakdown of elements contained in a POW ......................................................................... 193

Figure 100 First page of example BoQ contained in Appendix J ............................................................. 206

Figure 101 Key elements of a Schedule ................................................................................................... 207

Figure 102 Example Schedule .................................................................................................................. 208

Page 14: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE xiii REV 1.0

Figure 103 Example Schedule .................................................................................................................. 208

Figure 104 Quality Triangle ..................................................................................................................... 219

Figure 105 Sub-project schedule example .............................................................................................. 223

Figure 106 Gantt Chart example ............................................................................................................. 224

Figure 107 Grouping Strategies for coordination of Multiple Sites ........................................................ 225

Figure 108 Risk Management Plan step process ..................................................................................... 226

Figure 109 Risk Management Matrix ...................................................................................................... 226

Figure 110 Documentation Checklist for implementation by Administration or by Contract ................ 227

Figure 111 DOLE Website www.oshc.dole.gov.ph ................................................................................. 233

Figure 112 Occupational Safety and Health Personal Gear .................................................................... 234

Figure 113 Statement of Work Accomplished ........................................................................................ 243

Figure 114 Program of Works.................................................................................................................. 244

Figure 115 Construction Schedule and S-Curve ...................................................................................... 245

Figure 116 POW-SWA-Schedule Questioning Flow Chart ....................................................................... 247

Figure 117 Inspection Plan and Flow chart, concrete construction example ......................................... 251

Figure 118 Questioning Infra Flowchart – Site Inspection ...................................................................... 255

Figure 119 Site Mobilization Plan ............................................................................................................ 256

Figure 120 Construction Layout .............................................................................................................. 257

Figure 121 Building set out ...................................................................................................................... 258

Figure 122 Excavation with Shoring ........................................................................................................ 259

Figure 123 Soil Poisoning ......................................................................................................................... 260

Figure 124 Foundation Works – overview .............................................................................................. 262

Figure 125 Backfill and Compaction on Footings .................................................................................... 263

Figure 126 Slab on grade preparation ..................................................................................................... 263

Figure 127 Photograph of Steel Bar grading marks ................................................................................. 265

Figure 128 Steel Bar identification mark and PNS Grade Color code ..................................................... 266

Figure 129 Steel re-bar bundling arrangements and spacing ................................................................. 267

Figure 130 Examples of re-bar spacers ................................................................................................... 267

Figure 131 Wire ties for Steel Rebar ....................................................................................................... 268

Figure 132 Extract from ASSURE Specification for splicing ..................................................................... 270

Figure 133 Acceptable and Unacceptable Splicing Arrangements for Beams ........................................ 271

Figure 134 Acceptable and Unacceptable Splicing for cantilever beams ............................................... 272

Figure 135 Beam to Column Connection Detail ...................................................................................... 273

Figure 136 Splicing Arrangement for Column ......................................................................................... 274

Figure 137 Formwork .............................................................................................................................. 276

Figure 138 Formwork for column pouring .............................................................................................. 277

Page 15: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE xiv REV 1.0

Figure 139 Formwork preparation for roof beam. Safety & Health practice not model ........................ 277

Figure 140 Showing insufficient Cover over Reinforcing ........................................................................ 278

Figure 141 Typical concrete proportions ................................................................................................ 279

Figure 142 Manual screening and washing of aggregate ........................................................................ 281

Figure 143 Coarse, poorly graded river stone used in RAY Batch 1 ........................................................ 282

Figure 144 Volumetric measuring box .................................................................................................... 283

Figure 145 Mixing methods for concrete, mixing board, contained area and one-bagger mixer .......... 284

Figure 146 Example of poor concrete mixing method with no control of water content ...................... 284

Figure 147 Concrete Slump Test.............................................................................................................. 285

Figure 148 Slump test mechanisms ......................................................................................................... 286

Figure 149 Compression Testing cylinder ............................................................................................... 286

Figure 150 Concrete pouring of slab on grade ........................................................................................ 287

Figure 151 Concrete vibration ................................................................................................................. 288

Figure 152 Honeycombed concrete column, RAY Batch 1 ...................................................................... 289

Figure 153 Defective Masonry Blocks ..................................................................................................... 294

Figure 154 Masonry works - laying CHB .................................................................................................. 296

Figure 155 Masonry works - external & internal wall connections and openings .................................. 297

Figure 156 Steel Truss members ............................................................................................................. 299

Figure 157 Philippines National Standard for Steel Angle Bars ............................................................... 300

Figure 158 Acceptable and Defective Welds ........................................................................................... 302

Figure 159 Weld Technique ..................................................................................................................... 303

Figure 160 Electrode Movement during welding .................................................................................... 304

Figure 161 Welding Tee sections ............................................................................................................. 304

Figure 162 Poor weld bead characteristics ............................................................................................. 305

Figure 163 Good weld bead characteristics ............................................................................................ 305

Figure 164 Porosity .................................................................................................................................. 306

Figure 165 Excessive Splatter .................................................................................................................. 306

Figure 166 Incomplete Fusion ................................................................................................................. 306

Figure 167 Lack of Penetration................................................................................................................ 307

Figure 168 Excessive Penetration ............................................................................................................ 307

Figure 169 Burn through ......................................................................................................................... 307

Figure 170 Waviness of Bead .................................................................................................................. 307

Figure 171 Distortion ............................................................................................................................... 308

Figure 172 Weld field test ....................................................................................................................... 308

Figure 173 RAY batch 1 welding of trusses ............................................................................................. 309

Figure 174 Base Plate Anchor Bolt Connection ....................................................................................... 311

Page 16: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE xv REV 1.0

Figure 175 Truss Column connection problems, RAY Batch 1 implementation. Use of bent rebar & non-alignment examples ................................................................................................................................ 312

Figure 176 Roof truss installation guide .................................................................................................. 313

Figure 177 Purlin & Roof sheeting installation ........................................................................................ 314

Figure 178 Roof Sheeting Guide .............................................................................................................. 315

Figure 179 J-Bolt Installation Guide ........................................................................................................ 316

Figure 180 Timber Frame members ........................................................................................................ 318

Figure 181 Nailing of timber members ................................................................................................... 319

Page 17: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 1 REV 1.0

Page 18: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 2 REV 1.0

OVERVIEW AND KEY BBB CONCEPTS

Introduction

The AVID and DILG partnership for BBB

The Australian Volunteers for International Development (AVID) program has partnered with the Department of Interior and Local Government’s (DILG) Recovery Assistance on Yolanda (RAY) project to assist in restoring government services and improving resilience following the destruction caused by super typhoon Yolanda on 8 November 2013.

The AVID team was requested to produce this manual by the Director of the OPDS RAY team within DILG, and the need for this manual, specifically with the 4 modules covering the initiation, planning and design and implementation phases of the project cycle, is further supported by findings of JICA, who conducted a field study titled ‘Lessons Learnt from damage to Buildings by Bohol Earthquake and Typhoon Yolanda 2013 in the Philippines’.

The DILG is the executing agency for rehabilitation of partially damaged municipal facilities in the 171 municipalities impacted by Typhoon Yolanda and eligible for RAY funds. The scale of Yolanda has required the DILG to focus as an infrastructure delivery agent in partnership with Local Government Units (LGU’s). This is a newly expanded role for the DILG. Introducing the concepts of Build Back Better (BBB) to the LGU’s is a core objective of the RAY project to improve the overall resilience of communities in the face of climate change impacts, namely more frequent and intense destructive weather events, and in recognizing the vulnerability of the Philippines to multiple natural disasters.

This BBB Operations manual is the culmination of the collaboration between AVID and the DILG from September 2014 to July 2015, with AVID volunteers based in both Region VIII and Quezon City, Manila. The collaboration aims to provide the first revision of a compendium of information to assist LGU’s and the DILG to achieve BBB both in RAY projects and in projects associated with future calamity responses. The intention is that this manual commences the process of DILG incorporating BBB into all project delivery, and with this in mind, this version of the manual is identified as version 1.0.

Collaboration with other organizations with related aims within the Philippines also occurred, including with GIZ, Assure, ADB and JICA.

This first revision of the manual is a deliverable produced as a result of the following AVID initiatives (undertaken with DILG):

1) RAY Region VIII LGU Subproject Site Visits, October and November 2014.

2) Findings workshop with CO and Region VIII, Nov 25-26th 2014

3) AVID Inception Report, Dec 16th 2014

Page 19: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 3 REV 1.0

4) Inception Report Workshop with Region VIII PDMU and RAY Provincial Focal Persons, 01 Feb 2015

5) Central Office, Build Back Better and Project Management Workshops, February 2015

6) Region VI, RAY Batch 2 orientation workshops, Build Back Better and Project Management, Borocay, Iloilo and Roxas City, 16-24 March 2015

7) Field Officer training sessions ‘Questioning Infrastructure’ and ‘How to use the project Documents’, Samar, Leyte and Biliran, Feb and March 2015

8) BBB Operations Manual Content Development Workshop with Region VIII PDMU and RAY Provincial Focal Persons, 30th March 2015

9) Ray Batch 2 workshop sessions in Region VIII on Build Back Better concept, Project Scoping, Documentation for Quality, Scheduling and Communication for Quality, Palo, Leyte, 6th – 17th April 2015

10) Region IVB, RAY Batch 2 orientation workshop, Build Back Better and Project Management, Quezon City, 28 April 2105

11) BBB Operations Manual Feedback and Familiarization Workshop with Region VIII PDMU, Region VIII Provincial Focal Persons and Region VII PDMU, 8-9th June 2015.

An additional two workshops were also conducted as follows following the completion of Revision 1 of this manual:

12) BBB Operations Manual Training of Trainers, Region VIII, 22-23rd June 2015

13) BBB Operations Manual Orientation for Region VIII LGUs, 2nd – 10th July 2015

Purpose of this manual This manual aims to outline and contextualize the BBB concept as championed by the President of the Philippines, the United Nations and the Australian Government, in responding to calamities such as Yolanda. It will provide an overview of the broad principles of Building Back Better and how to gather learning’s from calamities to ensure a greater level of resilience and preparedness to future events, with a focus on ensuring decision making takes into account climate change and disaster risk reduction principles.

It will also drill into the detail of the ‘Resilient Infrastructure’ subsector of the BBB concept with a particular focus on ensuring structures are designed to a high standard alongside discussions of best practice project management principles, construction techniques, quality engineering, architectural, site and urban design and urban/environmental planning to provide a holistic BBB response aimed at increasing resilience and getting the affected communities back on their feet.

The manual will provide decision makers and those implementing projects after a calamity situation to ensure that the principles of BBB are implemented at all project stages, providing easy to use and accessible tools for BBB. Where possible existing tools and processes from Philippine government agencies, NGO’s and UN agencies have been incorporated into this manual in recognition that many high quality tools and documents have already been produced that can assist in the goals of BBB.

Page 20: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 4 REV 1.0

This manual has been produced around the DILG’s RAY program, hence the primary target of this manual is initially focused around the working case study of the Yolanda affected regions predominantly in region 8. It is the hope and intent of the AVID program and the DILG that the tools and techniques are applied on a much wider basis and we encourage DILG regions and LGU’s to utilize any of the materials herein towards any BBB responses to calamities.

Observations

It is noted that the AVID team was not operated in the traditional consultant role whereby the team is based at an arm’s length from the organization, the AVID team was instead fully integrated into the DILG structure, with two of the team members working predominantly within the OPDS Ray team in DILG’s Central office in Quezon City and the remainder of the team based in the Region VIII Regional Office of the DILG in Tacloban City, Leyte. This enabled the team to directly observe the realities of the implementation of these programs in both the central and regional offices, as well as by undertaking site visits and viewing project documentation, analysis of existing manuals, regulations and tools and meeting with other Philippine national government agencies, international government agencies and NGO’s.

Some initial observations of the team influencing the materials contained within this manual include:

1. Although there are examples of resilient, high quality and built back better structures, there has too often been a lack of quality in construction methods and material observed on site visits undertaken by the AVID team.

2. BBB in the Philippines is typically viewed as a construction/engineering issue rather than the broader internationally accepted version of BBB as championed through the UN’s Sendai Protocol. To ‘BBB’ in the Philippines is often thought to only be about building a structure ‘Back Stronger’ (or sometimes larger).

3. It has been observed that often not enough time has been allowed to undertake adequate scoping, planning and project design.

4. ‘For Construction’ and other documentation was observed to be lacking in sufficient detail for the project design to be implemented.

5. BBB in the Philippines is often viewed as a separate concept to those of DRR and CCA, rather than as inter-related concepts with BBB being a response towards achieving the goals of DRR and CCA.

Page 21: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 5 REV 1.0

What is BBB and why is it important?

BBB is not a new term, however it is one that is evolving and requires an interpretation to best fit the Philippine’s context. BBB is about empowering local authorities and communities to incorporate planning, consultation, analysis, design, construction and community in post disaster recovery.

The broadest internationally accepted interpretation of the BBB principle stems from the response to the 2004 Indian Ocean Earthquake and consequent Tsunami, whereby key learning’s were identified to achieve BBB, which address not only building stronger buildings, but also building stronger communities through inclusive planning and consultation, improved disaster preparedness and improving equity between the rich and poor.

The world struggled with the scale of the 2004 disaster; it wondered how this could happen, and how so much devastation could be inflicted. The tsunami caused untold damage to lives, communities, infrastructure and livelihoods. The phrase ‘Build Back Better’ was first used during this response. It was during this time, Bill Clinton identified a number of propositions, reflecting on what had worked, what could be improved and what we could do to in fact genuinely - Build Back Better. These propositions form the basis of the holistic BBB approach.

Figure 1 demonstrates the overarching principles of BBB.

Figure 1 Outline of Build Back Better

The key propositions that make up BBB, and what it means for the projects that DILG are preparing and implementing are discussed below.

Page 22: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 6 REV 1.0

Consultation – The residents and community affected are directly involved and consulted in BBB decision making processes. “Governments, donors, and aid agencies must recognize that families and communities drive their own recovery”. This is about talking to the communities and the end users of the infrastructure. It is about identifying the recovery priorities for communities. Each community may be slightly different in their needs, and this is perfectly legitimate. Listen to the needs and try to respond to hear the needs and what might help the communities.

Information – Information is gathered to improve the ability of decision makers to achieve BBB. Good recovery planning and effective coordination depend on good information”. During reconstruction, information in the form of hazard maps, ecological data, soil information, flood areas is vital to be able to make informed decisions and ensure that what is being planned will be sustainable and safe.

Social inclusion – BBB is for all of the community. Recovery must promote fairness and equity, People with Disabilities (PWD), elderly, women, children, rich or poor, formal or informal residents.

Economic Recovery – BBB cannot be complete without the community regaining economic self-sufficiency. From the start of recovery operations, governments and aid agencies must create opportunities for (small) entrepreneurs to flourish. Local economic recovery – government initiatives to support local economies.

Resilient Infrastructure – structures are designed and constructed to serve the community needs and meet the performance requirements in terms of design life and function. Resilient infrastructure enables LGU’s to initiate a quick recovery post calamity with minimal damage to buildings that are important for the operation of local governments and communities. This concept will be expanded on in the following section.

Resilient Communities – Communities who are working together to achieve an understanding of BBB can increase their collective strength and resilience to confront future calamities. Good recovery must leave communities safer by reducing risks and building resilience”

Local empowerment – Knowledge to allow local residents better understand risks can empower residents to make informed decisions. Local governments must be empowered to manage recovery efforts, and donors must devote greater resources to strengthening government recovery institutions, especially at the local level Barangay halls supported for functioning governance

Although the seven principles that make up Build Back Better are strongly inter-related it is prudent to recognize that existing governance structures require a focus on certain principles related to the mandates of the organization. In the case of the DILG’s work with LGUs, the focus principle is that of providing for ‘Resilient Infrastructure’.

Using the Yolanda (RAY) experience, and the learnings from the Australian Volunteers based in Region VIII and CO, they have identified the importance of implementation of using BBB

Page 23: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 7 REV 1.0

principals at all stages of the project cycle. It is not just related to Yolanda projects, but is integral to all projects, whether it is recovery from calamity, or design of a new road.

What is Resilient Infrastructure? Infrastructure includes the networks of buildings, open space, roads, pipes, drains and sidewalks that ensure that a community can function effectively from day to day. It may also be used to refer to social infrastructure such as governance, police and medical personnel. Resilience refers to the ability of the infrastructure assets to continue to operate and achieve their intended purposes both during and after a calamity. Resilient infrastructure should be constructed to achieve the objectives of Philippine Disaster and Risk Reduction Management Act of 2010 (RA 10121) as well as to DPWH and National Building Code standards.

To facilitate the construction of resilient infrastructure requires us to properly plan and scope the needs of a community, thereby increasing the likelihood of a piece of infrastructure being able to fulfil its long term goals. It also requires analysis to identify the strengths, weaknesses and gaps in our built environment.

Leading practices for rebuilding resilient infrastructure:

• Formulate long-term vision, guided by community and regional growth strategies (Integrated)

• Prioritize projects based on strategic importance, potential value, and available resources (Resourceful)

• Assess land-use impacts and construction regulations (Reflective)

• Incorporate economic, sustainability, and livability goals (Inclusive)

• Evaluate financing alternatives alongside government grants (Robust)

• Allow for changes to occur throughout the project scoping stage rather than locking in decisions that may have been made before all the information was available (Flexible)

• Ensure funds for redundant infrastructure is redirected towards that this is really needed (Redundant)

Figure 2 Principles of Resilience, ARUP (2014)

Page 24: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 8 REV 1.0

Resilient Infrastructure is about planning, designing and building structures to the required standards to ensure that the building’s users stay safe during a calamity. It’s about using the right fixings to secure the roof, so that it doesn’t blow off in high winds. It’s about vibrating concrete well and using the correct mix to avoid concrete that is honeycombed. It is thinking about new ideas for building design and incorporating CCA and DDR in the planning and design. It requires thinking about the longer term. It requires thinking about the people, communities and services that are needed. This is what we mean when we talk about BBB and resilient infrastructure.

Some infrastructure may be defined as ‘critical’, in which case if major problems were to occur were the infrastructure to be offline for even a short period of time for example a hospital, or any building designated as an evacuation center. It is vital that critical infrastructure is effectively able to operate, as per normal, even during and post major calamities.

Other infrastructure may be considered less essential in the immediate aftermath of a calamity but improves the life of residents, as in the case of a public market, or allows government and other groups to continue servicing the populace, as in the case of a Barangay Hall.

Public infrastructure includes buildings that are likely to be used as evacuation centers, temporary shelters and community centers for trade and social enterprises following a calamity event. In such cases, it may be prudent to designate all public Infrastructure as critical infrastructure, as well as ensuring that resilient infrastructure is viewed holistically to ensure its intended use can continue. For example, a municipal hall built to a high standard as an evacuation center may prove ineffective if the roads or other transport routes to the hall are flooded or blocked by debris. In which case people cannot access these centers, while goods such as food and water may not be able to access these locations.

Page 25: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 9 REV 1.0

Figure 3 Poblacion Daabantayan, Cebu (Engr. Shyrrah Faye V Elizaga, 2014)

Figure 4 Totally destroyed building in Region 8 (DILG, 2014)

Page 26: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 10 REV 1.0

Planning for resilient infrastructure

Infrastructure investment decisions have long-term consequences, as the assets can lock in future development patterns on a long term basis, therefore decisions on infrastructure should anticipate the long-term environment, needs and constraints under which it will function.

However, our ability to predict the future has been shown to be limited. Climate change is introducing deep uncertainty that makes this even more difficult. The environmental conditions under which infrastructure will need to perform is likely to change radically and infrastructure design needs to take this into account. Infrastructure must be planned to respond to the new normal of increasingly frequent and more intense disaster events due to climate change – building back the same is simply not enough.

Principles of achieving resilient infrastructure

The Table below outlines principles to be followed in order to achieve resilient infrastructure. It should also be noted that communication and coordination across all the different sectors and disciplines involved in enacting the principles outlined below is required to facilitate the achievement of resilient infrastructure.

Principle Description Risk and site assessments Plan ahead to understand and mitigate for possible risks and

hazards before a calamity to make the response more efficient

Scoping and planning of projects

Allowing enough time and resources to discuss, analyze information and consult. Utilize existing CLUP and land use plans to assist decision making, ensuring DRR and CCA principles are taken into account.

Site analysis An understanding of the site risks to ensure structures are located in the optimum building envelope on the subject site (e.g. avoiding areas likely to be subject to overland flow/landslides)

Architectural, Engineering and Urban Design and documentation

Utilize architectural, engineering and urban design options to improve both the structure’s resilience, as well as the public space surrounding it; ensuring the structures provide equitable access for people with disabilities

Materials and Construction quality

Quality construction including inspection and testing of materials and workmanship is essential to ensure safe, functional and durable structures. External monitoring of these quality checks by an impartial party strengthens these checks.

Figure 5 Table of Principles to achieve resilient infrastructure

Page 27: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 11 REV 1.0

Figure 6 Community Garden in Quezon City - an example of resilient infrastructure provision providing for both social and economic needs

Key Concepts to BBB

Using a Project Management approach to achieving BBB - An overview

A Project is defined as a temporary and unique endeavor.

It is temporary in that it has a definite beginning & end with a defined scope and a defined set of resources. It is unique in that it is not a routine operation, but a new initiative, which may be unfamiliar or a once off, and that it is carried out to accomplish a singular goal or objective.

The five stage project management cycle enables us to plan, prepare and implement for each stage.

Project Management is outlined as a linear process, however, this may not always be the case, and it is important to consider that as we move through the various stages, decisions made might require us to revisit an earlier stage to verify our understandings, assumptions and decisions. Therefore, when applying the project management framework in this manual, consider that you may need to revisit an earlier stage during the course of the project.

Application of good project management principles guides the implementation and engagement throughout. The principles guide decision making, implementation approaches and engagement with the project across the levels of management. Refer to Figure 7

Page 28: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 12 REV 1.0

Figure 7 Project Management Principles

The Project Management approach clarifies who is doing what and providing which inputs & information, thereby minimizing confusion. It also draws on the knowledge from different people to clearly define project and plan with greater certainty.

Figure 8 Project Management cartoon – project need vs what is delivered

Page 29: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 13 REV 1.0

The Project Management stages, as outlined in Figure 9 below, allow project to be carried out in logical steps, ensuring key information is gathered, analyzed and incorporated into the decision making process of a project.

Figure 9 Key project management stages

Using Project Management stages in a BBB construction project guides the implementation of BBB in the building of resilient infrastructure.

Table 1 Project Management Stages and Outcomes Project Management Stage

Key Outcome

Project Initiation Project goal, objectives and outcomes defined. Planning & Design Project options in terms of design & scope evaluated using all

information available, such as hazard maps & CLUPs. Development & documentation of detail design to define implementation and minimize costly changes during implementation.

Implementation Construction schedule, Construction Quality inspections (of the materials and works process) and variations managed

Monitoring & Evaluation

Project performance checked against predefined time, quality & cost indicators, such as the S-Curve. The monitoring & evaluation plan is developed during the planning and design stage.

Closing Filing of project documentation such as built drawings. Development & actioning of maintenance plans Lessons learnt documented and shared

Page 30: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 14 REV 1.0

In following the project management stages we can ask a number of questions to better define, identify and collaborate to seek the best solutions. Refer to Table 2

Table 2 Project Management Stages and Questions Project Initiation - defining the project need

Why are we doing this project? What are we trying to achieve?

are the project outcomes/outputs? is in or out of the scope? other projects could have an impact on the result or performance?

Planning and Design – defining what is to be delivered

What information do we need to plan the project? does the project look like? are the options? new technology can be incorporated?

How will the project be implemented? will we achieve the BBB objectives? will we manage project risk?

Who is responsible and what are the team roles? will we communicate with during the project?

Implementation – defining how construction will be carried out

How are we implementing safety and project practices? do we manage quality and keep to time, budget and scope?

Monitoring and Evaluation – how performance of scope, time and cost is being measured What are we measuring? Physical/Quality/Financial?

is the frequency/ reporting cycle? are the triggers that might require intervention?

Who is the audience? How will results and outcomes be measured?

will the team coordinate to monitor the sites and track progress?

Closing – how do we finalize the project and learn

What have we learnt? could we improve?

How do we handover the project do we complete reporting for physical, financial, quality? do we develop maintenance plans/ land use plan updates?

Page 31: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 15 REV 1.0

In carrying out projects in response to a calamity such as Yolanda, project management principles are just as important for projects carried out during “business as usual” time. Embedding good project management principles and practices during non-calamity times embeds the tools that can then be applied in response to a calamity.

Having established project management practices in place enables improved response to requests, effective collaboration and decision making when under pressure, understanding that (particularly early in the process) there will be times when there are gaps in information and demands will conflict. This BBB Operations Manual is developed to guide, support and assist in the implementation of projects considering these challenges.

Project Management – The BBB Quality triangle

Quality is about the safety, efficiency and good function of a building or structure. A quality building will above all be SAFE and FUNCTIONAL. That is, it can withstand the designed forces, and it effectively serves the purpose for the municipality or the community, for example it is designed and built so that PWD’s (people with disabilities) can also access it. A Quality building or structure will also minimize maintenance and operational costs, such as power to run air conditioners.

The Quality relationship is often represented as a triangle, with three factors having a major contribution to the ultimate Quality of a project, or in this case, infrastructure (Figure 10).

What about the amount of time we have to plan a project – if we have less time to investigate, plan, design and document a project the chances are that we will miss something, and will have to change it later – often at a greater cost to the budget, or having to change the performance or detail on the project. Time during construction is essential to quality, if we do not allow enough time for construction, then we may end up with additional cost to catch up, or a change in scope and an impact on the quality.

The way we Scope a project and spend time on the planning and design defines how much we know about the problem, issues and are able to prepare documentation before we start contracts and construction. The Scope clarifies what we know, and defines how we are going to fix it. The clearer we make the Scope, the less opportunity there is for uncertainty later in the project.

Cost: Having the right budget for the Scoped works is also part of the quality triangle. Not getting the budget right may lead to short cuts, inferior materials and inefficient practices.

All these factors can impact on quality. If we are talking about Building Back Better, we are also talking about resilient and quality infrastructure, so we can think about getting the cost, time and scope elements right to achieve Build Back Better with our infrastructure projects.

Page 32: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 16 REV 1.0

Figure 10 the 'BBB' quality triangle

Climate Change and the ‘new normal’ The Philippines is one of the world’s most natural hazard-prone countries and predicted to remain one of the top 20 countries likely to be most adversely affected by climate change. Up to 60% of the total land area is exposed to multiple hazards, and 74% of the population is vulnerable to natural disasters. On average, about 1,000 lives are lost every year due to natural disasters. Tropical cyclones (tropical depressions, storms, typhoons, and associated flooding) account for about three-quarters of recorded deaths and two-thirds of damage, but the archipelago is also exposed to drought, earthquakes, floods, landslides, tsunamis, volcanic eruptions, wildfire, and technological hazards. Among natural hazards, typhoons (storms) caused the largest number of deaths (31,373) and affected the largest population (9.3 million) with an annual cost of disasters to the economy estimated between 0.7 and 1% of gross domestic product (GDP).

Climate change is likely to have a significant impact on the Philippines, with the likelihood of increased occurrences of events which may lead to increased numbers of calamity events and/or increased event intensity. With about 60% of the country’s 1,497 municipalities and 137 cities located along the coast, impacts of sea level rise due to both climate change and local land subsidence are expected to be severe. Agriculture, fisheries, health, water resources, and infrastructure are likely to be severely impacted by climate change. As such we must view climate change variability as ‘the new normal’ and plan accordingly.

Page 33: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 17 REV 1.0

The role of urban/environmental planning towards achieving BBB

Land Use Planning is the process of making decisions to guide future action. The planning profession (commonly referred to as either ‘Urban Planning’ and/or ‘Environmental Planning’ in the Philippines) is specifically concerned with shaping cities, towns and regions by managing development, infrastructure and services.

The role of the planner is to help manage the development by producing and implementing plans and policies based on evidence. Planners analyze a range of social, economic, demographic and environmental issues in order to inform the physical and economic development of an area. They are involved in the establishment of housing, transport, social, economic and other infrastructure needs. In order to be effective, they must engage with the communities whose lives and livelihoods are being affected (PIA, 2014: RTPI, 2014).

The DILG has two existing definitions of urban and environmental planning:

‘Public control of the pattern of development’

(Guide to CDP preparation, DILG, 2008, pp.2).

‘To protect the common good or to promote the general welfare’

(Rationalizing the local planning system, 1st edition, 2008, DILG, section 1.2).

As Land use planning is an established system in the Philippines, a system that provides empowerment for decision making at the LGU level and provides a suite of tools to assist with strategic decision making, it is a good option to pursue as part of a broader BBB strategy. Indeed, Land use and infrastructure planning works to ensure that there is a holistic perspective and strategic vision applied to all spatial decisions, even short term decisions.

These considerations may include:

Predicted population growth (or decline) of Barangay or LGU

Demographic changes (e.g. how many young or older people)

Community needs and desires

How Climate change is likely to affect the community

What infrastructure is required to adequately service the local population

Page 34: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 18 REV 1.0

Better planning sees communities provided with tools and processes that can lower the likely damage and loss of life from a calamity situation. These can be used both during and immediately following a calamity. After which time, learnings can be recorded to mitigate against the expected adverse impacts of any future calamities.

Some of these tools include:

Mapping (Hazard maps and other ‘overlay’ maps)

Environmental and economic analysis of the LGU

Building location envelopes and proper siting (at strategic and site levels)

Urban design

Linking architectural designs to land use plans

These key ‘BBB’ concepts discussed above will be used throughout the remainder of this manual however they have been synthesized into workable tools and techniques to assist you to practically implement BBB.

Figure 11 Urban Planning has had a long history in the Philippines - Image shows proposed plan for Quezon City in the 1950's

Page 35: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 19 REV 1.0

MODULE 1: PRE & POST EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE

ASSESSMENT PROJECT STAGE: INITIATION

This section of the BBB Operations Manual covers:

PRE-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE PREPARATIONS – EARLY PREPARATIONS

■ Baseline Data Collection

■ Strategic Land Use Planning in Infrastructure Planning

PRE-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE PREPARATIONS – CRITICAL PREPAREDNESS ACTIONS

■ Site Safety Walks

■ Preparation of Equipment & Information

POST-EVENT INFORMATION GATHERING

■ Preliminary Post-Event Infra Assessment

■ Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection

■ Long Term Planning Assessment

Page 36: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 20 REV 1.0

Page 37: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 21 REV 1.0

Module Overview Pre and Post Event Infrastructure Assessment is about gathering vital information, which will;

inform and strengthen decision making in re-building using Build Back Better (BBB) principles

Inform and strengthen decision making in longer term Strategic Land use planning Otherwise be lost as damaged infrastructure further deteriorates over time, is

demolished or rehabilitated.

This information provides the most accurate data about the state of infrastructure prior to the calamity and a “First Capture” of the damage caused to the infrastructure by the calamity.

This accurate information is then used to more precisely define the constraints of any rebuilding or repair project, helping to clearly define what was damaged & how infrastructure was damaged by a calamity.

Gathering accurate information during the demanding Calamity response phase then allows rebuilding to be planned and executed as a normal project afterwards, without the time pressure of calamity response. It helps to pinpoint focus areas for the project, e.g. the strength of connections, quality of materials or location of the structure – which will all consequently impact the project scope, as will be discussed in Module 2.

Further, ensuring the collection and recording of thorough and accurate information on the state of infrastructure before and after a calamity (which may otherwise lost as infrastructure further deteriorates over time) allows a thorough and accurate assessment of how and why the damage occurred i.e. mode of failure – further discussed in Module 2.

Understanding the mode of failure of a piece of infrastructure then reinforces BBB by allowing the infrastructure to be strengthened against the previous mode of failure through the re-building/rehabilitation process.

And all this is only possible if thorough and accurate information is gathered Pre & Post-Event, to allow us to ‘treat the cause’ of the damage over and above the ‘symptom’

The importance of Pre-Event Assessment

Pre-Event assessment allows the strengths and weaknesses of existing infrastructure to be determined. This information then informs temporary measures that can be taken to secure the building against damage during the calamity. Following recovery from the calamity, temporary measures which prove to be effective in protecting the building against calamity should then be made permanent through their incorporation into Operation & Maintenance budgets.

Pre-Event Assessment also allows us to assess and take temporary measures to secure infrastructure under construction, and materials purchased for the completion of such projects, against damage.

Refer to the flowchart in the contents of this module for a summary of the steps and the relationships between the various steps outlined in this module.

Page 38: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 22 REV 1.0

Pre-Event Infrastructure Preparation – Early Preparations

Pre-Event Infrastructure Assessment is about capturing the state of existing infrastructure, and infrastructure under construction, prior to a calamity and recording this information for immediate action & for future reference.

In an immediate sense, Pre-Event Assessments will be used to identify temporary measures to protect the infrastructure from the impending calamity.

In a broader sense, this information will be used for future reference through informing LGU resources such as Baseline Information on LGU Infrastructure and informing & updating LGU tools such as hazard maps and the CLUP.

In considering Pre-Event Infrastructure Assessments (and Post-Event Information Gathering) it is recognized that LISTO has been developed as a resource of checklists and tools assisting LGUs in preparing for impending typhoons.

The actions & recommendations identified here are additional to LISTO and seek to strengthen the preparations included in LISTO with regards to incorporating Infrastructure into LGU preparations.

It is expected that LGUs will be responsible for execution of these Pre-Event Preparations.

A note on Early Preparations Vs. Actions to prepare for an impending calamity

Some Pre-Event Infrastructure preparations have been designated as Early Preparations. These are preparations identified in LISTO as “proactive actions taken as preparatory and necessary measures to be able to carry out the functions during the critical period when an Advisory or Alert is issued by PAGASA. They are done during “peace time” or when no immediate threat of a disaster (for typhoons and related hazards: during dry season).” (LGA DILG, 2015)

They are also prerequisites of the Checklist of Minimum Critical Preparations for Mayors.

The other actions, not noted as “Early Preparations” are to be carried out in the lead up to an impending calamity

Page 39: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 23 REV 1.0

Baseline Data Collection

Figure 12 LISTO (LGA DILG, 2015)

As shown above, LISTO includes Baseline data collection in the Early Preparations stage.

Strategic Infrastructure Planning Assessment A useful concurrent process to early preparations for any potential future calamity event is to ensure that the LGU has an approved CLUP in place for the entirety of the municipality, as well as ensuring that the information contained within the CLUP is the most up to date available. This review and update process is known as the ‘strategic infrastructure planning assessment’. It is strategic in that the entire LGU is considered holistically to decide on a future vision and pathway to ensure adequate and appropriate community infrastructure provision. This is also the time to be ensuring that the land use plan adheres to principles of both Climate Change adaptation and Disaster Risk Reduction (Refer to boxed text below).

It is important to recognize that the approved CLUP is both a statutory legal document and decision making tool that can make infrastructure and land use planning decisions easier in the future and particularly in the uncertain times surrounding a calamity. It is also a fluid document that can be constantly updated with new information. To consider the CLUP as purely a compliance activity or a static document does not allow the document to be used as intended and hinders effective decision making.

The CLUP should be viewed as the primary document for all local infrastructure planning decisions and regularly updated to ensure it is the accurate source for baseline data. It is important to ensure that hazard maps have been used in designing the land use plan and that DRR principles have been embedded within the plan.

Page 40: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 24 REV 1.0

What is the goal of incorporating climate change adaptation and mitigation and disaster risk reduction in the CLUP? The goal of incorporating climate change adaptation and mitigation and disaster risk reduction into

the CLUP is to be able to regulate and control physical development to reduce casualties and damage from discrete hazard events as well as minimize the negative impacts of slow-onset hazard events. Policies and spatial strategies in the CLUP and Zoning Ordinance should be able to achieve

the following:

Prevent future development in areas highly susceptible to hazards where possible;

Keep land use intensity, buildings value, and occupancy to a minimum in areas where development cannot be prevented;

Encourage risk mitigation through proper urban design, site planning, and building design in areas

where the above strategies are not viable and development occurs;

Protect life and existing development from losses;

Conserve protective environmental systems; and

Prevent future development from creating conditions that contribute to risk.

GIZ, 2015

Assuming that an approved CLUP is in place within the municipality the LGU should ensure that they have the most up to date data for their region. Much of this can be obtained through local knowledge, however government department and agencies hold much of this data and LGU’s have the right to access and utilize this information. Some examples of information sources are demonstrated in Figure 13 below (Climate change and hazard based information sources) and in Appendix A.

Page 41: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 25 REV 1.0

Figure 13 Hazard information sources, HLURB 2014

Page 42: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 26 REV 1.0

Should a CLUP not yet be in place for a municipality the ‘early preparation stage’ is the place to begin. The HLURB have produced updated guidelines to assist LGU’s in preparing the CLUP plans, whilst taking into account CCA and DRR principles. The guidebooks are available either by contacting the HLURB directly or can be downloaded free of charge in pdf format via the website (http://hlurb.gov.ph/local-government-units/?tabgarb=tab3). Volume 1 (The planning process) and volume 3 (Model Zoning Ordinance) are also available on the USB flash drive distributed during the BBB orientation workshops.

Figure 14 CLUP Guidebook

Resourcing issues notwithstanding it is recommended that LGU’s undertake the process of developing the CLUP themselves, working and engaging with the local communities to develop the CLUP. Although it may seem like a huge task at the outset, remember that when the CLUP is complete, future updates and reviews will be much quicker and easier processes. Taking this journey will also provide staff with a much wider ‘strategic’ understanding of their municipality.

Some LGU’s may choose to contract out the formulation of a CLUP to a private sector consultant – while this option is not necessarily discouraged the LGU must ensure that the consultants work with all LGU staff members (not just limited to planners) to gain both a working knowledge and to provide input into the development of the document, and to gain an understanding of how to use the document as the tool it is designed to be.

Infrastructure Replacement Cost & Construction time Preparing Baseline Data on infrastructure Replacement Cost & Construction Time will help LGUs assist the DILG in collecting meaningful information for the Post Disaster Needs Assessment (PDNA). The PDNA is a broad needs assessment compiled by the DILG on behalf of the National Government, covering Government, among a number of other sectors such as Agriculture, Trade & Tourism. It is initiated by the National Government Post Disaster to estimate the extent & cost of damage make needs known to the international community & initiate planning for recovery (Refer to Appendix B for more information on the PDNA).

It is anticipated that LGUs will compile & furnish information on the damage sustained by key infrastructure from a calamity to the DILG Regional Offices following a disaster to assist in compilation of the PDNA.

Page 43: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 27 REV 1.0

Hence baseline data must be generated by LGUs, as a part of Early Preparations, for Municipal Halls, Public Markets and Civic Centers as a minimum, followed by Barangay Facilities (Barangay Halls, Day Care Centers & Civic Centers).

These facilities have been identified as “vital LGU facilities/structures… whose restoration will help in normalizing the local government operations, provision of social services to public, and the socio-economic activities in the areas1.”

POWs used for construction or rehabilitation projects, for example RAY, can be used for compiling this baseline data. A recommended format for recording this data is shown in Table 3 below.

Table 3 Recommended Format for Baseline data on LGU Infra Replacement Cost & Time

LGU: Province:

Region: Year for Baseline:

Type of structure Total Replacement Cost (PhP) Days for full rebuild

Provincial/Municipal/City Hall

Public Market

Civic Centre

Barangay Hall

Barangay Day Care Centre

Barangay Civic Centre

Notes in filling out the Baseline Data on LGU Infra Replacement Cost & Time table. 1. POWs from repair/rehabilitation projects, for example RAY, can still be used for estimation of total

replacement cost. Total replacement cost & Days for full rebuild will be calculated as follows; Total Replacement Cost = Cost for repair ÷ (% of building repaired ÷ 100)

Days for full rebuild = Days for repair ÷ (% of building repaired ÷ 100) 2. If POWs are not available for building construction or repair – these costs must be derived by the

Municipal Engineering team.

3. Inflation must be taken into account if the baseline data is compiled some years after the POW was generated.

If “A” is the average % of inflation, “B” the year the POW was generated and “C” baseline year

Cost (replacement or repair) = Replacement cost x [(1+ A ÷ 100) (C-B)]

1 (Roxas, 2013)

Page 44: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 28 REV 1.0

Example of Baseline Data collation using RAY POW

Using the following RAY POW and assuming;

The POW was generated in 2013 and the baseline is being carried out in 2015

Average inflation between 2013 and 2015 was 2.5%

Repair was carried out on 45% of the building.

Total Replacement Cost

= Total POW Cost for repair ÷ (% of building repaired ÷ 100)

= 5,000,000 ÷ (45 ÷ 100)

= 11,111,111.11

Days for full rebuild

= Total days for repair ÷ (% of building repaired ÷ 100)

= 90 ÷ (45 ÷ 100)

= 200

Page 45: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 29 REV 1.0

Taking inflation into account

Total Replacement Cost becomes

= Calculated Unit Price x [(1+ A ÷ 100) (C-B)]

= 11,111,111.11x 1.0252

= 11,673,611.11

Table 4 Baseline data on LGU Infra Replacement Cost & Time Table using the POW above

LGU: XYZ Province: ABC

Region: Year for Baseline: 2015

Type of structure Total Replacement Cost (PhP) Days for full rebuild

Provincial/Municipal/City Hall

Public Market

Civic Centre

11673611 200

Barangay Hall

Barangay Day Care Centre

Barangay Civic Centre

Status for all LGU Infrastructure In January 2012, the DILG rolled out a Local Infrastructure Audit Form and corresponding Instructional Guide for Buildings.

It is strongly recommended that this audit be completed by the LGU for key infrastructure; Municipal Halls, Public Markets and Civic Centers as a minimum, followed by Barangay Facilities (Barangay Halls, Day Care Centers & Civic Centers), which have been identified as “vital LGU facilities/structures… [which] help in normalizing the local government operations, provision of social services to public, and the socio-economic activities in the areas” [post disaster].

Completing this form allows LGUs to develop a full idea of the status of key LGU infrastructure in terms of functionality, any required maintenance or upgrading and importantly, the potential for key infrastructure to be incorporated into pre-disaster planning.

This information on the status & capabilities of LGU infrastructure can then be used by technical specialists to make strategic planning decisions and inform the CLUP.

The Local Infrastructure Audit Form and Instructional Guide for Buildings can be found in Appendix C.

Page 46: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 30 REV 1.0

Strategic Land Use Planning in Infrastructure Planning Updates to CLUPs

Figure 15 LISTO (LGA DILG, 2015)

Updating the CLUP also forms a key part of Early Preparations in LISTO as shown above. In order to be making the best use of information learnt from previous calamity events, all such information must be used by LGUs to update their CLUPs, as a part of early preparations. This information may include maps & data such as areas affected by storm surge, the extent of previous flooding events or available Hazard Maps.

Incorporating this information into CLUPs allows LGUs to improve planning and governance to ensure that avoidable mistakes are not repeated. Vulnerable areas can also be identified and the use & development of such areas consequently better controlled.

A Note on How Information can be included in CLUPs

Photographs showing a wider strategic view of the events of calamity (such as Figure 16) can allow hazard maps to be updated to provide a more accurate assessment of those areas at risk of storm surge or flooding (such as shown in Figure 17) and to allow assessments of the effects of the calamity in other ways to assist authorities to better prepare for future events.

Page 47: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 31 REV 1.0

Figure 16 Photograph demonstrating extent of storm surge damage in a Yolanda affected community at a wider strategic planning level

Figure 17 Hazard Maps can be updated for improved decision making only if accurate information and data is collected and recorded

Multi-Hazard Map for Abuyog, Leyte

Page 48: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 32 REV 1.0

Figure 18 Example of using flooding data to map alongside geographic and political data to better understand the impacts on the community, NEDA

Figure 18 shows a screenshot of a ‘flythrough’ animation created by NEDA based on updated flooding data and photos. This allows us to see, for example, that access roads to the north and south of a residential area were blocked by floodwaters during the last flood event even though the residential area did not flood. This piece of information could be used in deciding to improve the road or to decide against placing an evacuation center within this zone due to the likelihood of it being difficult for people and goods to access the site.

Page 49: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 33 REV 1.0

Pre-Event Infrastructure Preparation – Critical Preparedness Actions

Pre-Event Infrastructure Assessment is about capturing the state of existing infrastructure, and infrastructure under construction, prior to a calamity and recording this information for immediate action & for future reference.

In an immediate sense, Pre-Event Assessments will be used to identify temporary measures to protect the infrastructure from the impending calamity.

In a broader sense, this information will be used for future reference through informing LGU resources such as Baseline Information on LGU Infrastructure and informing & updating LGU tools such as hazard maps and the CLUP.

In considering Pre-Event Infrastructure Assessments (and Post-Event Information Gathering) it is recognized that LISTO has been developed as a resource of checklists and tools assisting LGUs in preparing for impending typhoons.

The actions & recommendations identified here are additional to LISTO and seek to strengthen the preparations included in LISTO with regards to incorporating Infrastructure into LGU preparations.

It is expected that LGUs will be responsible for execution of these Pre-Event Preparations.

A note on Early Preparations Vs. Actions to prepare for an impending calamity

Some Pre-Event Infrastructure preparations have been designated as Early Preparations. These are preparations identified in LISTO as “proactive actions taken as preparatory and necessary measures to be able to carry out the functions during the critical period when an Advisory or Alert is issued by PAGASA. They are done during “peace time” or when no immediate threat of a disaster (for typhoons and related hazards: during dry season).” (LGA DILG, 2015)

They are also prerequisites of the Checklist of Minimum Critical Preparations for Mayors.

The other actions, not noted as “Early Preparations” are to be carried out in the lead up to an impending calamity

Site Safety Walks The aim of a Site Safety Walk as a Pre-Event Infrastructure Assessment tool is the identification of risks to existing infrastructure & infrastructure under construction and the consequent securing of infrastructure to minimize those risks.

This is carried out through questioning the preparedness of infrastructure for the impending calamity through a series of questions. These questions may then require actions to ensure the infrastructure is secured for the impending typhoon.

Page 50: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 34 REV 1.0

Infrastructure under construction will contain additional items to check for in a site safety walk due to the nature of a construction site. There is a separate site safety walk checklist for infrastructure under construction which is to be conducted in addition to the site safety walk checklist for existing infrastructure.

It is highly recommended that the Safety Supervisor in charge of the construction site be included in this site safety walk to expedite the actioning of any identified items.

It is recommended that the execution of the Site Safety Walk be a part of the “Issue Directives” step in the “Upon Alert” period of an impending Calamity. This is Reference Box A within the LISTO Checklist of Minimum Critical Preparations for Mayors and LISTO Checklist for MLGOOs, COPs and FMs.

These areas of the LISTO Checklists are copied and highlighted below.

Additional questions to strengthen Reference Box A for MLGOOs Site Safety Walk

1. Time completed by Municipal Engineering Team: ________________ 2. Actions recorded & passed on to Clearing Team: _________________

The actual walk should be carried out by the LGU with responsibility for LGU infrastructure as well as (in the case of infrastructure under construction) representatives from the builder.

Page 51: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 35 REV 1.0

Actioning of recommendations from the Site Safety walk should then fall to the “Clearing Operations Teams” Before the Typhoon. The relevant Checklists from LISTO are shown below. For the LISTO Checklist of Minimum Critical Preparations for Mayors.

Additional checkbox to strengthen Reference Box H for Mayors Complete actions identified from Site Safety Walk for securing

infrastructure

For the LISTO Checklist for MLGOOs, COPs and FMs.

Additional Action to strengthen Reference Box H for MLGOOs Complete actions identified from Site Safety Walk for securing

infrastructure

Page 52: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 36 REV 1.0

Site Safety Walk for Existing Infrastructure Module 1 Form 1

Purpose of Form: Identification of risks to existing infrastructure due to an impending calamity & recording of actions to minimize those risks Instructions: Work through the questions in the left column. Identify any unsecured, unprotected or loose items and develop & record actions to secure, protect or securely tie down these items. Record all findings in the second column actions in the second column.

Item Action

Are windows protected?

If not, install temporary window shutters.

Are there “Sail” materials on site – tarpaulins, noticeboards, banners?

Dismantle & secure “sail” materials

Is there loose material at height?

Relocate & securely store loose material at height at ground level.

Are water Tanks filled & towers braced?

If a generator is available & is it close to the building, fuelled & securely tied down? Is there a stockpile of fuel?

Is on site drainage clear?

Clear drains allow water to run off the site.

Are critical paper records secure, water proofed & elevated in the office?

Are items of value securely stored?

This will prevent theft following a calamity

Are there unsecured loose items around the property?

These will become dangerous projectiles in high winds with potential to damage buildings & people sheltering inside

Secure & tie down loose materials

Are there temporary buildings on site?

Secure & tie down temporary buildings to prevent parts of these buildings becoming projectiles in high winds

Is the Entrance & Exit clear?

Clear & secure loose items at least 5m from Entrance & Exit paths

Page 53: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 37 REV 1.0

Site Safety Walk for Infrastructure Under Construction Module 1 Form 2

Purpose of Form: Identification of risks to infrastructure under construction due to an impending calamity & recording of actions to minimize those risks

Instructions: First work through the Site Safety Walk for Existing Infrastructure – Module 1 Form 1.

In addition, work through the questions in the left column. Identify any unsecured, unprotected or loose items and develop & record actions to secure, protect or securely tie down these items. Record all findings in the second column actions in the second column.

It is highly recommended that the Safety Supervisor in charge of the construction site be included in this site safety walk to expedite the actioning of any identified items.

Item Action

Partially demolished buildings.

Overhanging walls or rooves should be fully demolished.

Remaining partially demolished elements should be secured and rubble disposed of or secured & tied down.

Partially completed structures should either be taken down or temporarily braced and secured.

Loose & weak materials on site should be removed or secured.

Deep and open Excavations should be shored/protected from Collapse. Excavations should be de-watered post calamity. If any collapse, advice should be sought from the engineer prior to continuing works.

Construction materials.

Are they neatly stored, secure & not blocking access.

Scaffolding should be dismantled & scaffold members secured

Excavators and heavy machinery. Are they in working order, full of fuel and parked in a secure position close to Entrance & Exit paths?

Is there a secure & sufficient supply of Fuel for Post-Event

Page 54: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 38 REV 1.0

Preparation of Equipment & Information Immediately Post-Event, power, equipment and communication tools are problematic.

In terms of Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment this needs to be prepared for prior to the calamity to allow meaningful Assessments to be carried out Post-Event.

In order to strengthen LISTO around Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment, the following list of equipment & information to be prepared has been put together.

Prior to the calamity this equipment & information must be gathered & securely stored by LGU staff responsible for LGU infrastructure, to facilitate Infrastructure Assessment Post-Event.

This list has been generated through considering what will be required for Infrastructure Assessments that may require equipment or utilities like power that may be difficult to obtain in a Post-Calamity situation.

It is recommended that these lists are inserted to the following locations within the LISTO Checklists.

Page 55: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 39 REV 1.0

Additional Items to Strengthen “Box C: List of Resources Needed by Cluster I” with regards to preparation for Infrastructure Assessment Post-Event

Baseline information for LGU Infrastructure costs

Drawings of existing infrastructure

Forms required for Post-Event Inspections

Camera’s and charged batteries

Flashlight and batteries to inspect building without power for lighting

Ladder

Pens – different colors, black, blue, red

Tape measures, rulers

Computer with fully charged battery for compilation of reports

Pocket Wi-Fi with fully charged battery for internet access if available

Charged Power Banks to recharge depleted mobile devices.

Page 56: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 40 REV 1.0

Post-Event Information Gathering Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment This section refers to the Infrastructure assessment carried out in the days and weeks immediately after a calamity.

This will be a time where services may still need to be restored and other recovery activities are being carried out.

This is, of course, a naturally difficult time for everyone. Damage to and security of personal effects, property, livelihoods, relatives all present valid & legitimate concerns for not only the general public, but all LGU employees also.

Carrying out Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessments are however a part of the “effective delivery of basic services to the Citizenry” as mandated for the DILG in RA 6975.

This section contains tools and processes to aid in providing a meaningful picture of the scale of damage in as simple a way as possible.

Recommendations for Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Reporting in LISTO One of the functions throughout all stages of LISTO is Monitoring & Reporting as shown in the portion of the Alpha checklist below.

Page 57: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 41 REV 1.0

Capturing the damage to infrastructure in an Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Report, soon after a calamity ensures vital information is gathered, which will otherwise degrade over time as buildings either deteriorate further or are demolished or re-built.

It also begins the process of gathering information the LGU will then use to provide meaningful – prompt & accurate – information to assist the DILG in compiling the PDNA, which will be requested by the National Government soon after the Disaster.

This report should be carried out by the LGU in the days following the calamity, only once immediate relief & emergency assistance works are established. It acts as a tool through which the LGU formally records damage from the calamity for future reference and, once complete, should be filed for future LGU use.

The Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Report is a quick sweep of key LGU infrastructure – Provincial/Municipal/City Halls, Public Markets, Civic Centers, Barangay Halls, Barangay Day Care Centers, Barangay Civic Centers – to photographically record the state of damage and photograph & measure high water levels from flooding or storm surges.

At the very minimum, photographs must capture all exterior sides of the infrastructure as well as the roof to show all damage to the building. A minimum of 3 photographs are suggested

1. From a front corner of the building 2. From the opposite back corner of the building 3. Overall Building showing the roof

If the building is too large, 4 photos, one of each side of the building may be required.

A note on Photos for the Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Report Following a calamity event, there is a limited opportunity to gather data to ensure we learn all we can from these events. This information can assist planners and decision makers in making their decisions based on tangible evidence and data. This information can then be used to improve planning and governance to ensure that avoidable mistakes are not repeated.

At this early stage, photos should be taken of anything out of the ordinary on the site of key Infrastructure. Anything that LGU staff notice as out of the ordinary may be helpful for and analyzed by Technical Specialists in the strategic land use planning process later.

Some examples of the type of data we may wish to gather include:

■ Which areas that have experienced flooding/storm-surges. What was the extent of the flooding/storm-surge?

■ Brief written notes or a sketch of something out of the ordinary you have observed.

■ Were any access roads blocked? Were alternative routes available?

Page 58: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 42 REV 1.0

Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Report Module 1 Form 3

Purpose of Form: To initially capture and report information on damage to infrastructure which may degrade over time

Instructions: Tick off the appropriate column once relevant photographs have been taken. In addition to photographing the high water level, measure and record the high water level from the existing ground level in meters

Submit Photos of damage in the Pro-Forma for photograph submission

LGU: Province: Region: Infrastructure Barangay Overall Photo

of Building including roof.

All 4 exterior sides of the building photographed

High Water Level Photo Measured

(m) Provincial/ Municipal/ City Hall

Public Market Civic Centre Barangay Hall Barangay Day Care Centre

Barangay Civic Centre

Pro-Forma for Photograph Submission LGU: Province: Region: Provincial/Municipal/City Hall INSERT PHOTOGRPHS HERE

Public Market INSERT PHOTOGRPHS HERE

Page 59: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 43 REV 1.0

Execution of Projects after Calamity Response as normal projects, without time pressure

Though the process of information gathering begins during the Calamity response phase, where there is high time pressure and demand on resources. Information gathering will continue after the Calamity response phase without high time pressure. This is because accurate & thorough information, which can not be gathered during Calamity Response phase, is required to allow the proper planning of rebuilding.

Thus it should be stated that the majority of planning and execution of rebuilding projects continues far beyond Calamity Response phase, and occurs as a normal project, without the demands and time pressure of the Calamity Response.

Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment and the PDNA It is anticipated that LGUs will compile & furnish information on the damage sustained by key infrastructure in a calamity to the DILG Regional Offices following a disaster. This will assist the DILG in compiling meaningful information for the Post Disaster Needs Assessment (PDNA).

This section will present the process through which LGUs can do this.

Background to PDNA

The PDNA is a broad needs assessment, covering Government, among a number of other sectors such as Agriculture, Trade & Tourism.

It is initiated by the National Government Post Disaster only once immediate relief & emergency assistance works are established. And it is used to estimate the extent & cost of damage, make needs known to the international community & initiate planning for recovery by agencies including NEDA, OCD & the NDRRMC.

Build Back Better Reconstruction takes time – 3 years or more as stated in PDNA documentation

In terms of infrastructure, “reconstruction needs are generally long-term in nature (usually 3 years or more) and are intended to ‘Build Back Better’ from the ruins of a disaster.” (PDRF, Deltares, NUS Feb 2013)

Building back better should therefore progress in tandem with technical assistance for improving construction standards to be more disaster resilient, followed by adopting and enforcement of these improved construction standards. See Appendix B for more information on the PDNA and planning for recovery.

Page 60: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 44 REV 1.0

Estimating Damage Costs

LGUs estimating the extent of damage through combining a visual inspection of damage to infrastructure and baseline information for LGU Infrastructure costs, significantly assists the DILG in compiling meaningful information for the PDNA.

Photos taken during the initial Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment should be used by LGUs to estimate damages to infrastructure using the following definitions.

Totally Destroyed – “visibly completely destroyed or unusable and need[ing] replacement” (PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

Partially Damaged – “Affected structures… that can be repaired or reused” (PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

For Partially damaged infrastructure, the portion of the building that is damaged must be estimated as a percentage.

These damage estimates can then be combined with the Baseline information for LGU Infrastructure, generated during Early Preparations to complete the Damage assessment summary for DILG below.

The completed report is to be then furnished to the DILG Regional office to assist in their compilation of the PDNA.

A Note on categorizing infrastructure as Partially or Totally Damaged

Estimates to facilitate compilation of the PDNA are very broad & general. Therefore categorization of infrastructure as totally or partially damaged at this stage can NOT be used to lock in infrastructure in either of these categories.

Buildings categorized as Partially damaged at this stage may be categorized as totally damaged in the Scoping Phase, Module 2, due to structural damage being revealed and repairs therefore being unviable. This could also happen during detailed design and confirmation of Scope items – Module 3, through, for example, the cost of repairing a damaged structure being found to be more than the cost of a new building.

Page 61: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 45 REV 1.0

Preliminary Damage Assessment Summary for DILG Module 1 Form 4

Purpose of Form: To capture rough estimates of the cost of damage to provide DILG with meaningful information for their compilation of the PDNA Instructions: Use Baseline Data from Early Preparations and ocular inspections the damage to roughly estimate the cost of damage & time required to repair the infrastructure. If Baseline Data is unavailable, a rough estimate will be sufficient.

LGU/Barangay: Province: Region: Estimated Damages Damaged Assets

Name of Barangay

Totally Destroyed

Partially Damaged Average Time to Repair

Cost (PhP) % Damage Cost (PhP) Days A B C D

Provincial/ Municipal/ City Hall

Public Market Civic Centre Barangay Hall Barangay Day Care Centre

Barangay Civic Centre

Notes in filling out the Damage Assessment Summary for DILG

The damage cost for partially damaged assets will be the % Damage multiplied by the total replacement cost in the baseline information. Column C = (Column B) x total replacement cost

For Totally Destroyed Infrastructure, the average time to repair will be the Days for full Rebuild in the baseline information. For Partially damaged infrastructure, the average time to repair will be the % Damage multiplied by the Days for full rebuild in the baseline information Column D = (Column B) x Days for full rebuild

In making Preliminary Damage Estimates, LGUs are being requested to broadly classify infrastructure as partially or totally damaged based on a cursory Post Disaster ocular inspection.

It is essential to understand that Damage Analysis in Module 2 may classify infrastructure initially listed as partially damaged as totally damaged, through revealing more extensive or structural damage that may make a repair unviable.

Initial estimates of damage cost will be less accurate than the rebuilding costs generated once thorough scoping & design has been completed as per Modules 2 & 3. This is because thorough scoping & design takes more information into account, takes more time to generate and is therefore more accurate.

Page 62: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 46 REV 1.0

Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection The Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment captures key information such as high water levels, which may be quickly lost with the passage of time. It is the broad first capture of information, which is a quick reference & summary of damage.

It also allows Urban/Environmental planners to strategically assess how a piece of infrastructure has been affected by its surrounding environment during a calamity, which can then inform future planning efforts during non-calamity time (and should be included as an update to the LGU’s CLUP).

Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment also informs the PDNA, which provides a broad overview of damage to infrastructure, and a variety of other sectors & industries across the whole country, in the weeks after a calamity for a higher level of government.

Following this initial wave of assessment, a more detailed Inspection will be required, to add detail to the Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment.

This detailed information will take more time to put together and consequently will occur, slightly after the initial wave of assessment has taken place, typically after Calamity response phase is over.

This Inspection begins the process of planning rebuilding as a normal project, without the time pressure and demands of Calamity Response. This planning process is then continued in Module 2 & 3, through which the cost of rebuilding is more thoroughly estimated and the extent of rebuilding decided and documented.

This is the detailed Inspection described in this section

This more accurate information further informs upper management about the scale of damage/re-construction, to assist in limited resources being deployed in the most efficient way

Background to the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection The aim of the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection is for the LGU to record a full picture of the extent of damage sustained by infrastructure. This information then assists LGUs in meaningfully scoping (as outlined in Module 2) and developing plans and estimates (as outlined in Module 3) for re-building. Thorough and accurate scoping, estimation and planning consequently helps LGUs build their infrastructure back better.

The Focus of Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection

The focus of the Inspection is to gather the information on what is damaged.

ANALYSIS to further determine how the infrastructure was damaged will be carried out during the Failure ANALYSIS Phase in Scoping – see Module 2 for more guidance.

In order for all information to be recorded, care must be taken to access all relevant building elements to ensure that the integrity of all building elements is inspected and confirmed.

Page 63: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 47 REV 1.0

Photographs are also required as an ocular record of damage which can be analyzed easily in the office at a later date.

This may require closer access to elements at height through use of ladders or other means such as temporary scaffold or cherry pickers.

Key objectives of this Detailed Post-Event Infra Damage Inspection are;

Complete & accurate recording of all damage to the infrastructure

Identifying the last re-usable element of the infrastructure, which we can build back from.

NOTE: The last reusable element of the infrastructure, which can be built back from may need some rehabilitation eg. repair to the top of an existing concrete column to enable new roof frames to be securely attached.

Once completed by the LGU, this Inspection Report must be submitted to the DILG R.O. for validation to ensure the key objectives outlined above are met.

It is acknowledged that reports which will be large in size (physically & electronically) due to the photos taken.

Consider the following options for submission depending on the circumstances Post-Disaster

If internet is available, consider email through internet cafes or Pocket Wi-Fi

If phone lines are available, consider printing photos and faxing the report.

If no internet or phone is available, consider sending electronic files on a USB via Courier OR Printing photos and the report and sending a physical copy via Courier.

Ensure copies of all documents sent to DILG are kept by the LGU.

Understanding the need for a complete & accurate Damage Inspection The damage Inspection forms the basis of planning to Build Back Batter, including scoping (Module 2), detailed design & cost estimation (Module 3).

It therefore follows that, thorough & complete plans to Build Back Batter, depend on thorough & complete damage Inspections.

A complete and accurate Damage Inspection also assists LGU Engineers to determine why the building failed – for further information see Module 2

Finally thorough & complete Inspections ensure all repairs are funded when the infrastructure is built back.

If damage is not recorded, it is not scoped and planned for in rebuilding and therefore repair or reconstruction of the infrastructure will not be completely thorough.

Once the Detailed Post-Event Damage Inspection has been completed, it must then be submitted to the DILG for a verification of the thoroughness and accuracy of the completed inspection.

Page 64: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 48 REV 1.0

Case Study: Roof Destroyed

A civic center had Typhoon damage to its roofing system.

The LGU submitted a detailed damage assessment and funding request for repair of the Civic Centre’s roof.

The damage assessment, however, did not recognize that the hold down bolts for the roof trusses were damaged and would therefore require repair.

The plans for the repair & the funding received therefore included the new roofing system, but not the repair of the hold down bolts required to securely hold down the roof trusses.

This was not noticed until the roofing system was fabricated and lifted into place for installation.

By this time it was already too late for additional funding to be obtained or plans to be put in place to repair the hold down bolts.

The repair progressed, and the roof trusses were held down with an alternate, less secure method.

Because the need to repair the hold down bolts was missed in the detailed damage assessment, the opportunity was lost to build the infrastructure back better.

In order to avoid a scenario like this it is recommended to

Ensure a Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection is carried out and verified

Best Course of Action

Ensure Validation of the works list is completed during scoping – Module 2

Good Course of Action

Investigate Options with the builder to rectify the issue when discovered on site.

Ok, but last resort

Page 65: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 49 REV 1.0

A note on taking Photographs

During the post event assessment phase, many photos will be taken to document the state of infrastructure.

Ordering of photos is vital to assist in the meaningful identification & collation of the hundreds of photos LGU staff will take during the Assessment & Inspection Phase once in the office.

When taking a series of photographs to document damage, the context of succeeding photos must be first captured in an identifiable way prior to taking succeeding photos the details of the damaged infrastructure.

The first photo must be an overall photo of the building.

This means that all photos between the overall photo of the first building and the overall photo of the next building pertain to the first building.

Take a photo of the main entrance prior to taking photos of damage on the first floor.

Take a photo identifying the second floor prior to taking photos of damage on the second floor.

For photographing detailed damage – for example cracks in a column.

Take a photograph of the area in which the damage is to be found – for example the wall where the cracked column is to allow easy identification of the location of the cracked column back in the office.

Then take a close up photo of the damage – the cracked column.

Page 66: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 50 REV 1.0

Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Module 1 Form 5

Purpose of Form: To record all damage sustained by the building – no analysis will be carried out here.

Damage must be recorded completely & accurately so that the completed inspection form will communicate; what the last re-usable element of infrastructure is, which can be used to build back from, so that, scoping and design can be carried out to Build Back Better.

Instructions: This is the first detailed inspection of damage to infrastructure after the DILG has broadly recorded the scale of damage through the PDNA in the days & weeks following a calamity.

This is the first effort, post-calamity, to thoroughly record all damage to a piece of infrastructure.

Thoroughly work through all Parts of the form, using the Guidance Notes that follow for assistance.

Part I. Building Information – Complete Prior to organizing site visit

Region: Province:

City/Municipality: Barangay:

Building Name:

Building Address:

Building Contact Person:

Contact Person’s Email:

Contact Person’s No.:

Contact Person’s Address:

No. of Storeys: Above ground: Below Ground:

Size. of Storeys (sq.m): Above ground: Below Ground:

Construction type: Concrete Frame: Timber Frame:

Steel Frame: Other, Pls Specify:

Designed Functionality: Provincial/Municipal/ City Hall:

Public Market:

Civic Centre: Other, Pls Specify:

Designed Occupancy: Number of regular building users

Date Constructed:

Original Construction: Yes/No Previously Rehabilitated: Yes/No

Utilities – Connection installed (Yes/No) & Status of supply (Cut off, restored, restoration date)

Installed Status Installed Status

Electricity: Water Supply:

Sanitary Piping: Drainage:

Communications (Phone, Internet):

Other, Pls Specify:

Page 67: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 51 REV 1.0

Records Available: As Build Drawings: Construction Drawings:

Other, Pls Specify:

Part II. Site Inspection tool Preparation – Obtain prior to site visit

Inspectors must have on hand the following equipment to carry out a meaningful inspection. Some or all of these tools should have been prepared prior to the calamity in line with LISTO preparations; Drawings of the infrastructure to be inspected

If engineering drawings are not available, hand sketches must be made to use during the inspection

See guidance notes for examples of the type of hand sketches required. Camera to photograph damage Ladder to safely access building elements - upper parts of walls, roof framing etc. Red, Blue, Black pens to mark up different types of comments on the form Tape measure and Ruler

Part III. Site Inspection

The Infrastructure Inspection Team (Municipal Engineer & Building Owner at the very minimum) should carry out the inspection in the following order

A. Inspection of Building site B. Inspection of Building Exterior C. Inspection of Building Interior – Floor by floor D. Inspection of Building Auxiliary Equipment

Inspectors are to look for damage using the inspection tables.

All damage discovered must be Described in the inspection table Marked on a drawing Photographed

Inspector/s: Position: Office/s:

Inspection Date and Time:

Page 68: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 52 REV 1.0

A. Inspection of Building Site Note location of service supply lines/pipes on the Site Plan

o Electrical Supply o Water Supply, Sanitary Piping, Drainage System o Communication Systems – Phone, Internet

Type of damage

Perimeter Fence, Water Tower, Land slip etc.

Comment

Description of Damage Extent of damage eg, half, quarter

Technical assistance required.

Marked on Drawing

Photo taken

Page 69: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 53 REV 1.0

•�1�•� � � � � FINAL�DRAFT�

B.�Inspection�of�Building�Exterior��

� Building�Element�

Damage�to�check� Comment�

Type� &� Description� of� Damage�Extent�of�damage�eg,�half,�quarter�

Extra�equipment�required�to�safely�access�eg�roof�system�

Technical�assistance�required.�

Location�Marked�on�Drawing�

Photo�taken�

1� Roof�Sheets� &�Roof�Drainage�

- Detached�- Bent�

� � �

2� Roofing�Framing��

(if�exposed)�

- Separation�from�Columns�- Misalignment�- Sagging�- Broken,�Buckled�Purlins�or�

Trusses�- Detached�bracing�

� � �

3� Parapet� - Cracks�- Spalling,�exposure�of�rebars�

� � �

4� Beams�� - Cracks�- Spalling,�exposure�of�rebars�- Sagging�- Broken,�buckled,�fractured��- Separation�of�joints.�

� � �

5� Walls� - Cracks�- Spalling�exposure�of�rebars�- Separation�of�joints�- Racking�

� � �

6� Columns�� - Cracks�- Spalling�exposure�of�rebars�- Column�out�of�plumb��- Broken,�buckled,�fractured��- Separation�of�joints.�

� � �

7� Cladding� - Detached�- Broken�

� � �

8� Ramps� - Cracks�- Spalling�exposure�of�rebars�- Displacement�of�railings�

� � �

9� External�Openings�–�Windows,�Doors�

- Broken�Glass�- Broken�Frames�- Lintel�Collapse�- Separation�from�Structure�

� � �

10� Foundation� - Excessive�settlement�- Tilting�- Scouring�

� � �

Page 70: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 54 REV 1.0

Page 71: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 55 REV 1.0

Page 72: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 56 REV 1.0

Page 73: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 57 REV 1.0

Guides & References Visual Reference of damage types

The photographs below have been gathered from LGU reports on Typhoon damage, DILG & LGU Engineering staff, Reports from NGOs such as JICA and GIZ/ASSURE and media reports

Detached roof sheeting

Example of bent back and missing green roof sheeting

Misalignment of steel/concrete

Example of bent over roof truss on bare

concrete columns

Page 74: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 58 REV 1.0

Sagging of steel/concrete/Timber

Example of sagging floor beam

Broken/Buckled Roof Frames

Example of broken & buckled

roof frames

Page 75: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 59 REV 1.0

Broken/Buckled Steel/Concrete

Left; Example of buckled concrete column with rebars exposed at bottom of stairs

Below; Example of broken concrete beam

Spalled Concrete – rebar exposure

Example of spalled concrete with rebar exposed

Page 76: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 60 REV 1.0

Cracked Steel/Concrete/Timber

Example of cracking below the roof line and above the window

Example of vertical crack in timber column

Page 77: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 61 REV 1.0

Separation of joints

Example of a gap & separation between concrete column and wall

Racking of walls

Example of racking – all of the wall structure is leaning to the left

Page 78: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 62 REV 1.0

Column out of plumb

Example of concrete column not vertical and straight

Foundation Settlement

Diagram of cracks generated by settlement of foundations

Page 79: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 63 REV 1.0

Foundation Tilting

Example of tilted foundation

Foundation Scouring

Example of scoured foundation, note soil “scoured” away from vertical foundation column

Page 80: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 64 REV 1.0

Punching shear for floor

Image and diagram of punching shear

Bowing of underground walls

Diagram of bowed a bowed underground wall

Page 81: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 65 REV 1.0

GUIDANCE NOTES FOR AND EXAMPLE OF DETAILED POST-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE DAMAGE INSPECTION

INSPECTION TEAM

The team must consist of, at the very minimum, the Municipal engineer or a technically trained representative of the Municipal Engineering office. This Technical Representative fulfils the duties of a Structural Inspector as per Section 107.3 of the NCSP. The Building owner or their representative must also be present.

The Municipal Engineering staff member must be present to ensure damage is recorded with sufficient detail and accuracy from a technical view point.

The Building Representative must be present as someone with authority to permit small amounts of DESTRUCTIVE EXPLORATION, as may be required for the purposes of completely clarifying the extent of damage.

DRAWINGS

Existing as Built Engineering drawings should be used for the purposes of recording the inspection.

However, if existing engineering drawings are not available, hand sketches must be made and used during the inspection.

Examples of acceptable base level hand drawings are below.

Page 82: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 66 REV 1.0

ACCEPTABLE HAND DRAWINGS – REQUIRED DRAWINGS FEATURES ARE NOTED IN RED

Page 83: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 67 REV 1.0

Page 84: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 68 REV 1.0

Page 85: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 69 REV 1.0

EXAMPLE OF A COMPLETED DETAILED POST-EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE DAMAGE INSPECTION

Page 86: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 70 REV 1.0

Page 87: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 71 REV 1.0

Page 88: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 72 REV 1.0

Page 89: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 73 REV 1.0

Page 90: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 74 REV 1.0

Page 91: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 75 REV 1.0

EXAMPLE OF MARKED UP DRAWINGS FOR A COMPLETED DETAILED POST EVENT INFRASTRUCTURE DAMAGE INSPECTION

Mark ups in Blue

Note the comments for guidance in red

Page 92: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 76 REV 1.0

Page 93: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 77 REV 1.0

Page 94: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 78 REV 1.0

Long Term Planning Assessment

The information gathered about the effects and extent of a calamity event in the Post-Event Information Gathering stage builds a more comprehensive set of data about these calamity events.

This in turn helps ensure that lessons which can be learnt from enduring a calamity event are not lost, but rather, can be analyzed by Technical experts and specialists to improve planning and governance to ensure that avoidable mistakes are not repeated.

It also allows planners and decision makers to make their decisions based on tangible evidence and update their decision making tools and processes, which can result in an improved and safer community for all when this information is used to inform an update of the LGU’s CLUP and zoning ordinances. It is prudent to note that updates to the CLUP do not necessarily need to be substantial, however they must be gazetted as part of the zoning ordinance to have statutory effect.

Examples of the outputs of this analysis and decision may include the creation of updated and more accurate hazard maps to guide decision making based on the realities of what actually occurred (therefore allowing more informed decisions on allowable uses and any building regulation or design interventions in particular sites, rather than blanket no build zones).

Figure 19 Debris cleared from road to facilitate the normalization of moving around the city of

Tacloban, Leyte, After Typhoon Yolanda

Page 95: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 79 REV 1.0

Module 1 Finalization By way of summary, through Module 1, the following documents will have been completed or updated & made available on file;

Baseline information for LGU infrastructure costs, Local Infrastructure Audit Form, An Updated CLUP, Site Safety Walks for Key LGU Infrastructure including Existing & Infrastructure under construction, Initial Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Report with many photos documenting the Damage sustained by Infrastructure due to the calamity, Preliminary Post-Event Infrastructure Assessment

All these documents will have been completed in order to facilitate the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection

The Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection is the key document required for progression to the next Module – Scoping.

The Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection will then need to be verified by a DILG representative as a check to ensure a thorough & accurate inspection has taken place

DILG Verification of the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection

DILG Verification of the Detailed Post-Event Infra Damage Inspection is carried out by DILG Technical staff once the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection is submitted by the LGU, to confirm the completeness and accuracy of the Inspection.

In short, verification confirms that the exact damage sustained is recorded.

Verification is to be carried out as soon as the Detailed Post Event Damage Inspection is received by the DILG Regional Office from the LGU.

Verification involves 3 steps

Step 1 - Confirming completeness of the Inspection.

This is carried out in the office using the flowchart below to examine the Infrastructure Damage Inspection report submitted by the LGU.

This may result in additional information being requested from the LGU or additional actions being required to allow clarification of the damage to be recorded, for example, scaffolding to access building elements at height, such as external parapets, roof framing, etc., for closer examination

OR

Removal of damaged building elements, such as cladding, a sagging ceiling, etc., to allow investigation of elements obscured by these damaged elements

Page 96: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 80 REV 1.0

Step 2 – LGU to furnish information or accomplish the actions identified from Step 1 as directed by the DILG Engineer

DILG Engineer must follow up with the LGU & MLGOO to confirm the progress and completion of these actions prior to the site visit.

Step 3 – Confirming accuracy of the Inspection through a site visit.

Once the information & actions from Step 2 have been furnished/accomplished, a site visit can be planned for the purposes of the DILG Regional Engineer confirming the accuracy of the information in the Inspection through a check of all building elements with an LGU representative.

Principles of Verification

Verification ensures vital information, which will point to the reason why a building failed (mode of failure) is recorded.

This vital information then allows the mode of failure to be determined (as discussed in Module 2).

Knowing why the building failed allows any weak elements to be built back stronger and built back better.

Page 97: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 81 REV 1.0

Page 98: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 82 REV 1.0

Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Verification Form Module 1 Form 6

Purpose of Form: To verify the completeness and accuracy of the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Form completed by the LGU

Instructions: Work through the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Form using the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Form Flow Chart.

Use this form as a checklist to verify information in the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Form completed by the LGU and record any clarifications.

Guidance Notes are provided below for assistance.

Building Element

Damage Information validated by Photos & comments on drawing? (Yes/No)

Clarifications or Actions required by the LGU

Confirmation of accuracy and comments from Site Visit

BUILDING DETAILS &VERIFICATION SIGN OFF

DILG Regional Engineer; Date:

LGU Representative; Date:

Building Name: Region:

City/Municipality: Province:

Page 99: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 83 REV 1.0

Guidance Notes For DILG Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Verification Flow Chart and Form

Confirming completeness of the inspection in the office.

Using the Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Verification flow chart, examine the Infrastructure Damage Inspection report submitted by the LGU.

Work down the inspection form element by element.

Read the comments on the form

Check the photos

Check the comments on the drawings of the infrastructure.

Use the Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Verification form; Note points requiring clarification from the LGU. Note actions to be carried out by the LGU for a more thorough Inspection to be completed.

The DILG Engineer must then call the LGU regarding the clarifications noted and to request the accomplishment of the physical actions noted as required to complete the Inspection.

Completion of these actions must be confirmed prior to the site visit by the DILG Engineer.

Confirming accuracy of the inspection through Site Verification.

During the site visit, carry out an ocular examination of all building elements on the Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection form with the LGU representative.

Building elements noted as damaged must be confirmed as such as per the Infra Inspection Form.

Note the accuracy of the information recorded and clarify any outstanding issues noted in the “Confirmation of accuracy and comments from Site Visit” column of the Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection Verification form

Ensure questions raised through use of the Verification flow chart are clarified

The interface between the building elements to be re-used and the building elements to be repaired must be clearly verified.

Page 100: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 84 REV 1.0

MODULE 2: BBB PROJECT SCOPE

PROJECT STAGE: PLANNING AND DESIGN This Module of the BBB Operations Manual covers:

IDENTIFICATION AND PRIORITIZATION OF DESIGN CRITERIA WITH RESPECT TO:

■ Strategic Land Use Planning and Analysis

■ Analysis of Function including Community Needs, Compliance Requirements and Sustainable Environmental Design

■ Analysis of Structure with regards to analysis of damage

CONCEPT DESIGN, DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS IN LINE WITH DESIGN CRITERIA

Page 101: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 85 REV 1.0

Page 102: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 86 REV 1.0

Module Overview Module 2 discusses the process of understanding the scope of your project by recognizing the parameters or restraints as well as identifying opportunities for improvement. This process differs from what has traditionally been called 'scoping' in that it does not deal with the detailed decisions of bills of quantities and the scope of works in a technical sense. These decisions will follow in Module 3 where you undertake a detailed design analysis, confirm scope items and produce POWs, BoQs and further documentation.

Instead, this module discusses the process of scoping in terms of design decisions by starting with land use analysis and planning at a municipal and then site level followed by analysis of function which talks about design decisions at a building level. Once the conceptual thinking of design parameters and opportunities has been undertaken, we then move onto an analysis of damage to the structure including analyzing the failure mechanism, identifying the cause of structural failure and taking the structure back to the element to be rehabilitated.

As you can see this process of analysis starts at the large scale of site, moves to the smaller scale of the building then smaller scale again of physical structure. The decisions made along the way will be documented in the Design Criteria Form that creates the first physical output of Module 2 but it is important to remember that this process may not be as linear as outlined and decisions made at the structural level may require you to re-visit land use decisions or building decisions and vice versa.

Following the Design Criteria Form we then move on to creating the concept design and documentation that records or documents the decisions made in the Design Criteria Form. For example, the Design Criteria Form may state you require a ramp. The next step is to draw and document that ramp to understand how it works, where it is sited and its general construction. Throughout this process you will be guided on how to produce a concept design, concept drawings as well as a Concept Design Decisions Form which documents general construction types and decisions made to date. This Form will assist you in reviewing how well the design matches the Criteria and intent as well as providing basic information that will help you in Module 3.

The processes outlined – with the exception of the damage analysis – could easily be undertaken prior to a program or project being in place and would then form a kind of feasibility study. If your LGU was pro-active it would be possible to create concept designs or even just Design Criteria's for government buildings throughout your municipality. This would help you understand the needs of your community and identify how government infrastructure could meet those needs in the future. The driving force behind this module is that government has a responsibility to be a leading example of good design (and therefore good building practice) in their communities and to be working hard to ensure they are continually improving their community's access to safe, functional and enjoyable public buildings.

Page 103: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 87 REV 1.0

Design Criteria This section outlines the processes required to define the design criteria. The design criteria are the parameters of the particular project as well as the opportunities identified for inclusion taking into consideration land use, functionality and structural failure. There is a form at the end of the module (Design Criteria) that allows for the documentation of all decisions made at this stage of the project which will assist you with the development of a concept design, documentation and drawings at the end of the module.

Each sub-section of this Design Criteria Section corresponds to a portion to be filled out in the Design Criteria Form. In order to thoroughly document your BBB decisions, it is strongly recommended that the corresponding portions of the Design Criteria form be filled out progressively as you work through this section.

Basic Info In order to undertake a thorough and accurate analysis of land use, function and structure it is important to first ensure basic information of the existing building is recorded on the Design Criteria Form. You have already gathered most of this information through the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection – for more information refer to Module 1 – but some additional information is required. The purpose of the this section of design criteria, when read in conjunction with the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection, is to immediately highlight to you the basic services required in the project. It is important to understand what essential upgrades are required in the project before you consider additional works.

Filling out the basic information may require reading regulations and codes. As far as is possible the references to specific codes have been included in the Design Criteria form however these may get superseded over time so it is your LGU's responsibility to ensure you are referencing the most current codes. Now is also a good time to consider any new information, programs, trainings or requirements that have been stipulated for the type of project you are undertaking.

Land use planning & analysis to BBB

This section of the BBB Operations manual will cover:

The role of the DILG and LGU in strategic land use planning in infrastructure planning

Tools to turn data and information into useful infrastructure planning tools

The importance of incorporating CCR and DRR principles into infrastructure

How to use the CLUP and Zoning ordinance to Build Back Better

Site design, building location envelopes and quality urban design

Page 104: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 88 REV 1.0

Figure 20 UN Habitat's land use planning cycle, 2014

Tools for land use analysis and information The land use planning process is a continuing process of working with stakeholders and the public to understand what decisions need to be made and what options are available to try and prevent a potential problem from occurring in the future. Figure 20 above demonstrates this process in a simplified format and shows the broad process that occurs during any planning decision making process.

To Build Back Better requires an analysis of the information that we have gathered in the previous stages. In many cases this data does not need to take a highly technical form, and can include the lived experience of local residents. Three of the principle analytical tools are that of urban analysis, climate change risk analysis and vulnerability analysis as defined below.

Urban Analysis, particularly understanding how the city works and examining its current status and future trends (such as population growth and economic development);

Climate Change Risk Analysis, particularly projections of direct and indirect climate impacts; and Vulnerability Analysis, particularly of the urban population that faces high exposure risk to climate change impacts and has limited coping capacity with which to weather these impacts.

Page 105: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 89 REV 1.0

Figure 21 A simple analytical tool for planning for infrastructure, CSIRO 2015

It is also useful to undertake a broad sweep of other information sources. A list of government agencies and publicly available information held by these agencies is included in Appendix A. If the LGU already has an approved CLUP as part of the early preparation (pre-event) this exercise will be made easier by allowing for a comparison of hazard maps and land use zoning requirements measured against the actual calamity event. It is best to use both local resources alongside any national/provincial government resources to allow you to check for any inconsistency in the data sets or maps.

The role of the DILG and LGU in strategic land use & Infra planning

In the Philippines, LGUs are provided with a significant amount of power for decision making at the local level. While LGUs often face legitimate resourcing and financial concerns, this does not have to be a hindrance to good planning. In fact, better planning may assist the LGU in demonstrating the need for additional funding.

Land use and infrastructure planning works to ensure that there is a holistic perspective and strategic vision applied to all spatial decisions, even short term decisions. This allows development and infrastructure projects to achieve sustainable development for growing communities.

Page 106: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 90 REV 1.0

These considerations may include:

Predicted population growth (or decline) of Barangay or LGU

Demographic changes (e.g. how many young or older people)

Community needs and desires

Environmental, economic and social changes

Better planning sees communities provided with tools and processes that can lower the likely damage and loss of life from a calamity situation. These can be used both during and immediately following a calamity. After which time, learnings can be recorded to mitigate against further calamities that may affect an area in the future.

Some of these tools include:

Mapping

Environmental analysis

Building location envelopes and proper siting (at strategic and site levels)

Urban design

Linking architectural designs to land use plans

Tools for Community-Based hazard analysis

The main purpose for community-based hazard analysis is to get more detailed hazard information and validate city-level hazard maps. Community observations may also be used to validate the trends of slow-onset hazards related to climate change (such as sea level rise). It should be noted, however that a community-based assessment will mostly be limited to past and current hazard events and may not reflect future potential events. Observations will be based on events that occur more frequently or have occurred within their lifetime. Thus the community assessment should be placed within the context of a scientific assessment which can include the possibility of future events.

Aside from obtaining necessary information, the main principle for doing community-based assessment is to involve the people in the situation analysis and make them more active participants in the planning process. The activities proposed below have the added benefit of making people more aware of the hazards facing their area and may lead them to take initial actions themselves.

Community-based assessment may be done after the city has prioritized areas for assessment after the city-wide hazard characterization and risk assessment activity. Alternately, it may be initiated at the barangay or community-level and fed into the city-level assessment.

Page 107: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 91 REV 1.0

Examples of community based hazard analysis processes include

1) Transect Walk

Page 108: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 92 REV 1.0

2) Hazard Identification and Assessment

Objective: To identify each of the hazards occurring in the community as well as those that are likely to occur/to understand the nature and behavior of the hazards or threats. • Trace historical land use from as far back as existing records (documents, maps, pictures, etc.) and verified information are available;

• Presentation shall be in chronological order, from the earliest time to the present;

• Identify the major land use activities and their location

• Establish the historical land use trends by describing significant changes noted from one point to another.

Determine and rank the priority issues and problems which need to be addressed using the list of issues and problems generated

The following simple criteria may be useful

• Urgency of problem

• Seriousness of the problem

• Extent/magnitude of population directly or indirectly affected

• Impact of problem on the strengths, potentials, and opportunities of the

city/ municipality and or other localities

3) Historical Profiling/ Timeline or Trend Analysis

Objective: To identify each of the hazards occurring in the community as well as those that are likely to occur/to understand the nature and behavior of the hazards or threats. This can be expanded upon by allowing community members to create Hazard and Resource Mapping.

Page 109: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 93 REV 1.0

Depending on the time available, the above activities can be combined or done in conjunction with other community-based assessment activities for other sectors. There are additional and more detailed varieties of these community based hazard process available in latest HLURB CLUP Guidelines.

Page 110: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 94 REV 1.0

Strategic environmental and watershed planning to BBB Ecosystems serve as protective buffers against natural hazards. They increase the resilience of communities by strengthening livelihoods and the availability and quality of drinking water, food supplies and other natural resources. Through the process of urban expansion, cities transform their surrounding environment and often generate new risks. The urbanization of watersheds can modify hydrological regimes and destabilize slopes, increasing hazards such as floods and landslides. Maintaining a balance between human actions and ecosystems is an excellent strategy for reducing risk and contributing to resilience and sustainability.

Planners play an important role in protecting and enhancing biodiversity, environmentally sensitive areas and ecosystems. In particular, planners can help relocate, minimize or prohibit development (planned and informal) in environmentally sensitive areas like estuaries, wetlands and important coastal habitats like mangrove forests. Keeping development out of these areas can help to improve a city’s protection from river flooding and erosion, and marine storm surges and erosion. Mangroves and wetlands traditionally act as a natural storm surge barrier – it has been estimated by the Department of Science and Technology that up to 70-80% less storm surge intensity could have occurred were the natural mangroves in place during Typhoon Yolanda.

In addition to the environmental benefits of these actions (e.g. habitat protection), other climate benefits can also be realized. For example, urban green spaces can help to cool the air and provide shade to help limit urban heat island effects. Green spaces also act as carbon sinks to mitigate carbon emissions.

The new CLUP guidelines utilizes a holistic approach to planning by promoting spatial planning as a strategic level activity based on naturally occurring ‘watersheds’. This level of planning allows for the cause and effect of climate stimuli to be understood and mitigated against, although this requires effective communications and partnership between LGU’s.

Page 111: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 95 REV 1.0

Figure 22 The new CLUP guidelines promote the total watershed management approach to planning

Page 112: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 96 REV 1.0

Figure 23 Demonstrates overlapping watersheds (HLURB, 2015)

Figure 24 Sustainable Transport options - E-Jeepney, Tacloban City

Page 113: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 97 REV 1.0

Site Level planning Consider the likely risks and hazards on a site before designating a building location envelope, this is even more important for public infrastructure assets and buildings designated as evacuation centers.

The following example based on the work of the Japanese aid agency (JICA), demonstrates the decision making process behind the placement of a school building.

Designate an area for the building location envelope (the part of the site where the physical building structure will be located)

Ensure this site factors in the

most likely risks that may affect the site

Ensure access requirements are

considered in the site design i.e. for people’s accessibility, but also for resource deliveries, construction and maintenance

Structures/Buildings near or along riverbanks and waterways:

Adopt 40 meters setback

along shorelines, measured from the highest water level at high tide

Note the direction of flow of the river

Page 114: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 98 REV 1.0

Urban Design to BBB

Urban design is a process that planners can employ to provide detailed guidance to the development of areas in the city. Urban design seeks to realize the vision for an area by making the public realm more organized, aesthetically pleasing, and functional. It is the science of ‘place-making’ which enhances the value of a city and improves the quality of life of its people.

Urban design draws together the fields of planning and transportation policy, architectural design, development economics, landscape and engineering. It considers environmental responsibility, social equity, and economic viability to create livable places of beauty and unique identity (Llewellyn-Davies, 2000).

When implemented well urban design can have a substantive effect on a location with design considerations to increase perceptions of safety (e.g. quality lighting, skinny trees, music and encouragement of public usage of open spaces), increase social equity (equal access to public

Structures/Buildings near or along hills/ridges with slopes exceeding 100% should:

Adopt 6 meters

setback

Page 115: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 99 REV 1.0

space, promotion of walking and incidental exercise for fitness) it can also be used to create economic benefits as people congregate and socialize in a pleasant well designed public space.

An example of a well-designed public space in the Philippines can be found in the Iloilo waterfront development, which incorporates a number of these urban design elements to create a safe, attractive and well utilized public space.

In areas at risk of flooding one effective urban design intervention is through water sensitive urban design activities. These can provide drainage systems to dissipate water through mimicking of natural systems. Examples include swales, porous concrete and bio-filtration basins.

Page 116: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 100 REV 1.0

Some Water Sensitive Urban Design options are outlined below:

Page 117: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 101 REV 1.0

How to use the CLUP and Zoning ordinance to Build Back Better

The CLUP and Zoning Ordinance are powerful legal tools that can assist your community to achieve BBB. When used as a development and infrastructure control tool, it ensures that buildings are only sited in appropriate areas - designed and situated appropriately to mitigate against local hazards and other site specific land use factors (e.g. topography, environmental requirements), with high quality urban design and architectural innovations.

The CLUP

The LGUs, shall, in conformity with existing laws, continue to prepare their respective comprehensive land use plans enacted through zoning ordinances which shall be the primary & dominant bases for the future use of land resources. Sec. 20 (c), RA 7160

The CDP

The LDCs shall … formulate long-term, medium-term and annual socioeconomic development plans & policies Sec. 109, RA 7160

Each LGU shall have a comprehensive multi-sectoral development plan … Sec. 106, RA 7160

Page 118: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 102 REV 1.0

Zoning ordinances, when enacted either by resolution by the legislative body, or any formal enactment adopting the plan, becomes a legally enforceable document complete with penal sanctions. When the CLUP is enacted through a zoning ordinance (sec 20c) this remains in effect even after the changes in incumbent officials and theoretically is unaffected by the political cycle.

At the local implementation level the CLUP is assigned to the Sanggunian of the LGU, whilst the CDP is the responsibility of the Local Development Council. Planning and development in regional offices is led by the Local Planning and Development Coordinators (LPDC) alongside the Municipal/Local Government Operations Officer (MLGOO).

Section 14: Zoning Incentives – the power to Innovate! Section 14 of the zoning ordinance gives LGUs authority at the local level to approve zoning incentives that are designed to encourage best practice in designing and Building Back Better.

“Density bonuses, such as through allowable building height increases, may be provided as incentives for projects that use CCA/DRMM technology or innovations i.e. use of solar panels, rainwater harvesting, smart urban drainage systems, green architecture/building systems.

Similar incentives may also be given to projects that provide wider setbacks, increased ground level open spaces, provides public infrastructure or conserve heritage sites.”

When using the zoning ordinance to facilitate innovative design – refer to Annex 8-6 in the updated CLUP Guidelines (Volume 1) for assistance

Section 17: Public Access to water easement

Article 51 of the water code states that “banks of rivers and streams and the shores of the seas and lakes throughout their entire length and within a zone of three meters in urban areas, 20 meters in agricultural areas and 40 meters in forest areas, along their margins are subject to the easement of public use in the interest of recreation, navigation, floatage, fishing and salvage.”

This means that the LGU has the legal right to manage these waterside areas for the public good. Property ownership does not extinguish this legal right.

Page 119: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 103 REV 1.0

What is the goal of incorporating climate change adaptation and mitigation and disaster risk reduction in the CLUP?

The goal of incorporating climate change adaptation and mitigation and disaster risk reduction into

the CLUP is to be able to regulate and control physical development to reduce casualties and damage from discrete hazard events as well as minimize the negative impacts of slow-onset hazard events. Policies and spatial strategies in the CLUP and Zoning Ordinance should be able to achieve

the following:

Prevent future development in areas highly susceptible to hazards where possible;

Keep land use intensity, buildings value, and occupancy to a minimum in areas where development cannot be prevented;

Encourage risk mitigation through proper urban design, site planning, and building design in areas

where the above strategies are not viable and development occurs;

Protect life and existing development from losses;

Conserve protective environmental systems; and

Prevent future development from creating conditions that contribute to risk.

GIZ, 2015

Page 120: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 104 REV 1.0

Locational Clearances can be linked to design requirements to ensure BBB

The following flowchart demonstrates the process to secure Locational Clearance from the zoning administrator/zoning officer – ensuring BBB design processes are taken into account.

Notes:

1 No locational clearance should be issued to proposals unless the requirements of the Environmental Compliance Certificate have first been complied with.

2 if the project is declared as a ‘project of national significance’ by the NEDA board, the HLURB will issue the locational clearance rather than the LGU.

3 The locational clearance is valid for a period of one year in which to commence or undertake the use, failure to do so will result in automatic expiration and cancellation of the clearance.

Page 121: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 105 REV 1.0

Defining Policy Options for Climate Change Adaptation and Disaster Risk Reduction in the CLUP/ Zoning Ordinance

OVERVIEW OF STEPS

Figure 25 Reconstruction of a Church building after Yolanda

Page 122: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 106 REV 1.0

Analysis of Functionality & Performance to BBB This section outlines a process that may be new to LGUs and Regions but includes content that should already be familiar. The process of analyzing functionality and performance of the government infrastructure involves:

Community Needs - The engagement of community to understand and assess community needs both current and future

Compliance Requirements – The understanding of compliance requirements for every public building such as accessibility, gender equality and amenities.

BBB Sustainable Design – The need to incorporate sustainable solutions in all building works no matter what the scale, from shading on windows to zero carbon emission buildings

These steps be discussed in detail below and are essential in all projects on all sites in order to be considered a BBB project because any time maintenance, repair, rehabilitation or building work is undertaken, this process should be undertaken

The purpose of this process is based on the underlying assumption that the government has a responsibility to be a leading example of good design practice (that subsequently translates to good building practice) and should be striving to continually improve the amenity (i.e. useability), safety and function of buildings to benefit the community it serves.

Inherent in the analysis of these elements is the process of prioritization of separate elements as not everything will always be able to be included. In the past, funding has often been the main criteria for prioritization and this is sometimes the case. However, this module sets out a clear process that can and should be undertaken with the amenity, safety and function of the building for the community as the main criteria. Once elements have been prioritized according to that criteria and documented only then should budget become a factor. This is because the only way to secure adequate budget is with a clear plan for what this site or project could and should be for the community.

Community Needs Similar to the Community-Based Hazard Analysis you undertook in the Land Use Planning & Analysis to BBB section above, engaging the community in the Analysis of Functionality & Performance of a sub-project can provide a more detailed view of how government infrastructure is used by all members of the community. Additionally, community engagement can provide useful information about community needs – current and future – that are not being met. To be BBB, government infrastructure projects should improve the amenity of the community and design buildings that will meet these needs.

At the building level, community engagement should answer questions of community needs as well as the formal and informal use of the current infrastructure. Formal uses of the building include those that the building or site is designed for. Informal uses of the building include how the building is used in a way that was potentially unintended by the designers. Examples of informal use could include teenagers rehearsing dances on the grass in front of the building; tricycle drivers gathering under the shade of a big tree; or skate boarders using the ramps and stairs at night. Community engagement can help you identify these uses and potentially come up with creative solutions to issues. For example, community gardens are recognized as one of the most effective programs to achieve community resilience. Perhaps part of a large site with access to water could be dedicated to a community garden?

A number of tools exist to engage and empower the community in the concept stage, Figure 26 -

Page 123: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 107 REV 1.0

Figure 29 outline four tools that could be used. Each tool would have a different outcome so it is important to choose a relevant tool.

Figure 26 Identifying Beauty Tool

Page 124: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 108 REV 1.0

Figure 27 Stakeholder Mapping Tool

Page 125: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 109 REV 1.0

Figure 28 The Power of 10 Tool

Page 126: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 110 REV 1.0

Figure 29 Collaborative Design Workshop

Page 127: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 111 REV 1.0

Compliance Requirements

This section outlines some of the most important requirements to comply with codes, regulations and legislation for buildings in the Philippines – government infrastructure or otherwise. They are a list of the most commonly neglected elements of government buildings, without which the building does not comply and will not achieve BBB Project Completion. The below list of items is by no means exhaustive so it is the LGU's responsibility to ensure full compliance on each project – feel free to add information into this manual as you find it. In a new project there can be no exception to the inclusion of each of the items below. However, in an existing building that is being repaired or rehabilitated it may not be possible to include all of these items despite their importance. This section will discuss each item as well as suggest a process for how to prioritize these elements in the case of repair and rehabilitation.

If not now, WHEN? If not you, WHO?

Figure 30 Be Honest Mural (Brotherhood of Christian Businessmen and Professionals)

It is easy to believe a building should comply with all relevant legislation and codes. It is much harder

to ensure that this becomes reality. There can be the common thought that 'oh well, my neighbor has done a ramp that isn't quite to code so I don't have to worry either'. Or to think that it's ok to partially comply and to disregard elements of legislation that do no suit the particular project. For

example, a common example is to have a ramp at the front of a building but the ramp does not have handrails and is too steep. Yes it could be argued that this ramp is better than nothing. However,

when it comes to buildings – and especially government infrastructure which is explicitly for the use of the public – near enough is not good enough. Even if no other building in your municipality

complies, NOW is a great time to start complying, on THIS project. Over time, with each new project, you can build a municipality that does comply with legislation and as a result is far more use-able for

the people of your municipality. By adhering to the BBB standards outlined below you have the opportunity to create Best Practice municipalities that are a fantastic example to others in the region and country for the kind of safe, inclusive, amenable and functional society you strive for. If not now,

when? If not you, who?

Page 128: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 112 REV 1.0

Requirements for PWD Ramps

Ramps for people with disabilities. These are legislated and are mandatory but building a ramp that is not correct is like a meal without rice – it just doesn't make sense! A ramp that isn't designed correctly is useful to no-one and a waste of money.

Figure 31 Ramp Dimensions

Figure 32 Handrail Dimensions

Page 129: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 113 REV 1.0

Figure 33 Ramp Curbs and Traffic

Ramp design can be complex but Figure 31 - Figure 33 provide a basic overview and the most important design considerations, including:

Gradient can be no greater than 1:12

Landings are needed every 6m as well as at the top and bottom and must be at least 1.8m long

The ramp most be at least 1.2m wide (clear) to allow enough space for a wheelchair

Curb is required on edge of ramp to prevent wheelchair wheel sliding off edge

When facing oncoming traffic the ramp must have a handrail to prevent wheelchairs from entering traffic at the end of the landing

Handrails must be at 0.7m and 0.9m above finished floor level (of ramp)

Dimensions of handrail (circumference) must be 30 – 50mm for hand grip

Handrails must sit clear of walls/upstands to allow the hand to grip all the way around

Much research has gone into the specific dimensions required for ramps and they are based on the size of wheelchairs and the space required for them to move. The dimensions are incredibly specific and need to be adhered to. For example, the 1.8m length of a landing is to ensure there is space for a wheelchair to come to a complete stop on flat ground. This is necessary to allow for a wheelchair user to have a break from physically pushing themselves up a ramp. The PWD access issues are

Page 130: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 114 REV 1.0

predominantly for people in wheelchairs but also are designed to accommodate people with general mobility issues who may not be in a wheelchair – for example the elderly, pregnant women and people on crutches. When designing buildings, think particularly about entrances, exits and movement through the building. Any changes in finished floor levels are difficult for PWD so design the plan to eradicate level changes. This refers to small level changes on the same floor plane and is not addressing the issue of multiple storey buildings. Buildings with multiple storeys should have ramps between every floor, or if the budget allows, a lift. Ramps and stairs can consume a large portion of the floor space but when designed properly and efficiently do not have to equal a waste of space. A common solution is to enclose the space under stairs and ramps and use that for storage. Perhaps a good place for removable window shutters to be stored?

Requirements for Amenities

In the past, simply providing plumbed washrooms in a building was a goal for municipalities. BBB requires all buildings to not only provide plumbed washrooms but the adequate number of male, female and PWD washrooms. The requirements are outlined in the DPWH Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications2.

Figure 34 is an excerpt from the DPWH Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications outlining how many cubicles – male, female and PWD – are needed for how many occupants in a Municipal building. Refer to the standards for the relevant table for your building type – logically there are different levels of amenity required for different types of buildings.

Figure 34 Toilet Requirements for Municipal Buildings

2 DPWH Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications

Page 131: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 115 REV 1.0

Figure 35 Minimum Toilet Stall Dimensions

Figure 36 PWD Toilet and Grab Rail Dimensions

Page 132: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 116 REV 1.0

Figure 37 PWD Toilet and Grab Rail Dimensions cont’d

Figure 38 PWD Toilet & Grab Rail Dimensions cont'd

Figure 39 PWD Toilet & Grab Rail Dimensions cont'd

Page 133: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 117 REV 1.0

Figure 35 explains the required dimensions of a regular cubicle as well as a PWD cubicle. Similarly to ramps, the dimensions are not suggestions but must be adhered to be to compliant. Able-bodied people and PWD both have required amounts of space to maneuver in a small space such as a wash room. The PWD cubicle requires minimum spaces as well as handrails and the minimum door width of 0.8m clear. Particularly important but often forgotten in designing a PWD cubicle is the space required outside the cubicle. The hatching indicates the amount of clear space needed – note that this space is not clear if there is a column protruding into the space, nor is it clear if there is a filing cabinet or storage shelves placed within the hatched area. Figure 36 - Figure 39 show detail regarding the placement required for grab rails and fixtures and fittings in the PWD cubicle. The design requirements of handrails for ramps are the same for wash rooms (the circumference and the clearance from the wall).

Even if the building is rarely used by people with disabilities or impairments, it is essential for provide for their access. Included in the UN MDGs and proposed SDGs (to be ratified at the end of 2015) is the goal to reduce inequality within countries and make cities inclusive. Washrooms, ramps and socially inclusive spaces ensure inequality in the use of buildings is eradicated. Furthermore, by providing spaces that are use-able for all members of your municipality you create a more resilient, safe and BBB municipality.

Requirements for Gender Equality

Gender equality in infrastructure relates to the ability of all members of society to use the building – similarly to PWD compliance. This section includes three elements that will vastly increase the amenity of the infrastructure to women and parents. Also note, this is an area of legislation that is constantly being updated with new requirements being relatively frequent so it is important your LGU remains current. Update this manual with any new information regarding gender equality in infrastructure for future projects.

Figure 40 VAW Desk Poster

RA9262 – The Violence Against Women and Children Act – mandates that barangays must have a VAW Desk and gender safe spaces (as per Figure 40). Repair and rehabilitation, depending on the extent of it, allows a perfect opportunity for evaluating which government building would best house gender safe spaces remembering that mandates stipulate minimums and it is always an option to provide more if the municipality would benefit. Some programs will stipulate in guidelines that an increase in floor area is not permitted however it is also required to include these spaces. With adequate documentation and the support of legislation the increase in floor area may be allowed or you may be able to apply for funding from other sources.

Page 134: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 118 REV 1.0

VAW desks in Barangay facilities must include a rear entrance that is well-lit to preserve the privacy and dignity of a victim wishing to enter. It must also have its own washroom facilities. To be truly safe spaces, these must be dedicated spaces and cannot simply be 'the Vice-Mayor's office when he isn't around' or they do not properly protect the privacy of the woman.

Figure 41 shows a Breastfeeding Room sign. Breastfeeding rooms are common in government buildings already but this serves as a reminder to include one if it is not already in the project. Think about the use of the building, how frequently used these rooms may be and therefore how many people they would need to accommodate. A breastfeeding woman may have additional children so the room may need to include space for women to breastfeed but also for other children to play safely while they wait.

Figure 41 Breastfeeding Room Sign Figure 42 Baby Change Table

Figure 42 Baby Change Tables are a cheap addition that achieves a more use-able building for both men and women. The most useful place to install a baby change table is in a washroom that can be accessed by both men and women – for example the PWD washroom is often the best place. Allowing everyone access to the change table means a parent or carer of either gender can change the baby.

Tip: When installing a baby change table, breastfeeding room, washroom or any amenity be sure to also install signage. A baby change table will not be used if there is no sign alerting the public to its existence.

Page 135: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 119 REV 1.0

Gender Equality

To provide truly inclusive spaces, it is important to understand gender equality and the ways of achieving it.

Barangays should have a VAW Desk Officer whose job it is to educate the community on the rights of women. If your municipality has not received training on appropriate gender equality measures or

needs a refresher course these VAW Desk Officers may be a good place to start. Understanding gender equality – as explained in Figure 43 – allows you to design more gender-

inclusive infrastructure.

Figure 43 Gender Equality Source http://www.studentshow.com/gallery/23813991/Gender-Equality-Infographic-UN-My-World-(Spring-2015)

Page 136: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 120 REV 1.0

Green Code

At the time of launching this manual the Green Code of Philippines had not been released but is due to be in 2015. It will be essential to be educated in Green Building and comply with relevant legislation. Many of the items listed below as BBB Sustainable Design will no doubt soon become mandatory. Update this manual with references to and key legislation from the Green Code as soon as it is released and ensure your LGU is adequately trained to design to these new requirements.

How Compliance Requirements Inform the Design Criteria

In order for the compliance requirements outlined above – along with all other compliance requirements – to inform the design criteria of your particular sub-project you must identify the relevance of each item to your sub-project and undertake a process of prioritization. For example, if your sub-project is a covered court that sits at ground level then a ramp will not be necessary and neither will gender safe spaces (because there is no indoor space at the covered court) but you have found that wash rooms need to be built and the roof shape could be re-designed to be more disaster resilient. For that example, the process of prioritization was simple. This is not always the case.

It is important to understand first and foremost that this process of prioritization is a scoping exercise and does NOT take into consideration budget. At this phase of the project it is imperative that the list of requirements is thought of only in terms of absolute priority to the amenity of the building. This is for a number reasons. To truly be BBB, a project must include all of the compliance requirements and therefore the Design Criteria Form must document them all. Secondly, if budget shifts or funding agreements does not allow for all the scoped BBB requirements, you as the LGU have solid documentation to apply for other funding sources for that building element. If other funding sources are not available, at the very least you as an LGU are building a database of information about what your municipal infrastructure should include and you are creating goals to aim for.

The process of prioritization must be undertaken by the project team and should take into consideration community needs (as discussed in Community Needs section) as well as LGU aims and objectives. It may be a lengthy discussion to decide or it may be straightforward. Either way, the discussion should be had and once decided, should be entered into the design criteria form. Note, the list of priorities is a record of the decision-making process at this time. When proceeding through Module 2 and 3 and designing more and more detail into the project these priorities may shift. That is normal. However, whenever a shift occurs the process of prioritization should be re-visited and any changes (and reasons for change) documented.

Page 137: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 121 REV 1.0

BBB Sustainable Environmental Design

BBB Sustainable design is about designing green buildings. Figure 44 shows how sustainability can have a range of definitions, concepts and design considerations. Given the qualitative and quantitative information we have about climate change, it could be argued that only the most complex definition of sustainability should be adhered to and all others are not enough. This is certainly true and sustainability should be integrated into every building – whether new or rehabilitated – but different municipalities will have different capacities for this and may need to begin with simple initiatives and add complexity with each new project. The exciting thing about sustainability is that there is always new information, materials and technology becoming available to improve a building's performance so there is room for constant improvement and learning.

Figure 44 Understanding Environmental Sustainability

The term ‘Sustainability’

In the Philippines, the word sustainability often means maintenance. So the sustainability of the building refers to how easily or well it can be maintained. Internationally, sustainability means green and refers to the environmental impact and sustainability of the infrastructure. This module refers mainly to environmental sustainability with maintenance being one aspect to consider during the

process of designing for sustainability. Also, be sure to use the word 'sustainable' as well as 'green' in searches to get the best information.

Page 138: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 122 REV 1.0

In BBB Sustainable Environmental Design we will discuss the simple sustainability measures as well as zero emission buildings – the most complex and integrated solution. This will give you a foundation of where to begin with sustainability as long as an understanding of the long term goal. The simple sustainability measures we will cover include:

Passive Cooling Thermal Mass Insulation Shading Building Orientation (For new buildings) Water tanks Solar Panels

Figure 45 Environmental Sustainability Strategies

Passive Cooling

What is passive cooling?

Passive cooling is the least expensive means of cooling a building in both financial and environmental terms.

As cooling requirements are dictated by climate, distinctly different approaches to passive cooling are required for:

hot humid climates – where no heating is required temperate and warm climates – where both heating and cooling are required cool and cold climates – where heating needs are more important.

This manual will discuss only hot humid climates.

Cooling people

Page 139: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 123 REV 1.0

Factors affecting comfort for people (human thermal comfort) include both physiological and psychological factors. To be effective, passive cooling needs to cool both the building and the people in it. Evaporation of perspiration is the most effective physiological cooling process. It requires air movement and moderate to low humidity (less than 60%). Radiant heat loss is also important, both physiologically and psychologically. It involves direct radiation to cooler surfaces.

Conduction contributes to both types of comfort and involves body contact with cooler surfaces. It is most effective when people are sedentary (e.g. sleeping on a water bed).

Cooling buildings

The efficiency of the building envelope can be maximized in a number of ways to minimize heat gain: 1. shading windows, walls and roofs from direct solar radiation 2. using lighter colored roofs to reflect heat 3. using insulation and buffer zones to minimize conducted and radiated heat gains 4. making selective or limited use of thermal mass to avoid storing daytime heat gains.

To maximize heat loss, use the following natural sources of cooling: air movement cooling breezes evaporation earth coupling reflection of radiation.

Cooling sources

Sources of passive cooling are more varied and complex than passive heating, which comes from a single, predictable source — solar radiation.

Varying combinations of innovative envelope design, air movement, evaporative cooling, earth-coupled thermal mass, lifestyle choices and acclimatization are required to provide adequate cooling comfort in most climate zones. Additional mechanical cooling may be required in hot humid climates and in extreme conditions in many climates, especially as climate change leads to higher temperatures during the daytime and overnight.

Air movement

Air movement is the most important element of passive cooling. It cools people by increasing evaporation and requires both breeze capture and fans for back-up in still conditions.

It also cools buildings by carrying heat out of the building as warmed air and replacing it with cooler external air. Moving air also carries heat to mechanical cooling systems where it is removed by heat pumps and recirculated. This requires well-designed openings (windows, doors and vents) and unrestricted breeze paths.

In all climates, air movement is useful for cooling people, but it may be less effective during periods of high humidity. An air speed of 0.5m/s equates to a 3°C drop in temperature at a relative humidity of 50%. This is a one-off physiological cooling effect resulting from heat being drawn from the body to evaporate perspiration. Air movement exposes the skin to dryer air. Increased air speeds do not increase cooling at lower relative humidity but air speeds up to 1.0m/s can increase evaporative cooling in higher humidity. Air speeds above 1.0m/s usually cause discomfort.

Cool breezes

Page 140: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 124 REV 1.0

Where the climate provides cooling breezes, maximizing their flow through a building when cooling is required is an essential component of passive design. Unlike cool night air, these breezes tend to occur in the late afternoon or early evening when cooling requirements usually peak. Figure 46 shows openings designed to capture these breezes and maximize their flow through the building – whether a home or government building.

Figure 46 Capturing Cooling Breezes

The major setback of ventilation techniques in buildings is that they require openings which present a risk to disaster-resilient buildings. Disaster-resilient buildings does not mean having no openings but rather designing so the risk is minimized as much as possible. For example, ensuring the openings are designed within Build Back Better guidelines (for example, they aren't too big) and also that sufficient protection is provided for a hazard (for example, with shutters).

Page 141: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 125 REV 1.0

Curved Roof

Ventilation and the thermal chimney effect can be achieved with a curved roof (discussed in the Curved Roof as part of Concept Design in Module 2) as a strong roof structure for disaster-resilient

buildings. Draw below how you think a curved roof might achieve ventilation in the same way as the above example:

What this design does however, is reduce the strength of the curved roof structure by allowing air through it. In hot months, this is desirable but when a typhoon is approaching this becomes a risk. In order to maintain the strength of a curved roof you would need to ensure all windows can be closed and shutters close all air gaps effectively. This is a design decision that needs to be made weighing up

the pro's and con's (benefits of ventilation vs risks of uplift in a hazard event) and choosing the appropriate solution for your municipality and this particular building. Perhaps it is not appropriate to use in an evacuation center or government offices but might be on in a daycare center that will

not be inhabited during a hazard nor stores important documents.

Thermal Mass

Thermal mass is the ability of a material to absorb and store heat energy. A lot of heat energy is required to change the temperature of high density materials like concrete, bricks and tiles. They are therefore said to have high thermal mass. Lightweight materials such as timber have low thermal mass – Figure 47 shows the different thermal mass of different materials. Appropriate use of thermal mass throughout buildings can make a big difference to comfort and cooling bills.

Figure 47 Graph of Thermal Mass of Different Materials

Page 142: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 126 REV 1.0

Thermal mass can store solar energy during the day and re-radiate it at night. Thermal mass, correctly used, moderates internal temperatures by averaging out diurnal (day−night) extremes. This increases comfort and reduces energy costs. Use of high mass construction is generally not recommended in hot humid climates due to their limited diurnal range. Due to the current use of high thermal mass materials such as concrete slabs, concrete roofs and concrete block walls, this section will talk about how to harness as much positive impact from thermal mass as possible if these materials absolutely must be used. However, as your municipality moves towards more complex sustainability goals, these high thermal mass materials must be re-thought for their appropriateness. Concrete slabs and concrete blocks may remain appropriate on ground level for disaster-resilience but upper storeys could be lightweight material such as wood, and needs to be balanced with the requirement to withstand the external wind loadings.

Poor use of thermal mass can exacerbate the worst extremes of the climate and can be a huge energy and comfort liability. To be effective, thermal mass must be integrated with sound passive design techniques. This means having appropriate areas of glazing facing appropriate directions with appropriate levels of shading, ventilation, insulation and thermal mass.

How thermal mass works

Figure 48 Thermal Mass Day and Night

Thermal mass acts as a thermal battery. During summer it absorbs heat during the day and releases it by night to cooling breezes or clear night skies as per Figure 48. This effect can also be referred to as night purging – purging hot air during the night to reduce temperatures the next day. This may be more appropriate in buildings with security or perhaps only on higher level windows as it requires windows to be open throughout the night.

Thermal mass is not a substitute for insulation. Thermal mass stores and re-releases heat; insulation stops heat flowing into or out of the building. A high thermal mass material is not generally a good thermal insulator.

Thermal mass is particularly beneficial where there is a big difference between day and night outdoor temperatures which is why hot humid climates are not ideal for thermal mass as temperatures do not vary significantly between night and day.

In this tropical climate the most important element to improving thermal mass is to protect it from summer sun with shading (both internally and externally) and insulation. Allow cool night breezes and air currents to pass over the thermal mass, drawing out all the stored energy. Thermal mass’s ability to

Page 143: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 127 REV 1.0

absorb and re-radiate heat over many hours means that in summer or hot climates it can be a source of unwelcome heat long after the sun has set.

Insulation

Insulation acts as a barrier to heat flow and is essential for keeping a building cool in summer. A well-insulated and well-designed building provides year-round comfort, cutting cooling bills by up to half. This, in turn, reduces greenhouse gas emissions.

Climatic conditions influence the appropriate level and type of insulation. Insulation must cater for seasonal as well as daily variations in temperature. Figure 49 shows the amount of heat gain through different surfaces of a building.

Figure 49 Heat Gain without Insulation

Use passive design techniques in conjunction with insulation. For example, if insulation is installed but the building is not properly shaded, built-up heat can be kept in by the insulation, creating an ‘oven’ effect.

Insulation can also help with weatherproofing and eliminate moisture problems such as condensation; some types of insulation also have soundproofing qualities.

Bulk insulation mainly resists the transfer of conducted and convected heat, relying on pockets of trapped air within its structure. Its thermal resistance is essentially the same regardless of the direction of heat flow through it.

Reflective insulation mainly resists radiant heat flow due to its high reflectivity and low emissivity (ability to re-radiate heat). It relies on the presence of an air layer of at least 25mm next to the shiny surface. The thermal resistance of reflective insulation varies with the direction of heat flow through it.

Single skin high mass walls such as commonly used concrete block can have their thermal performance significantly improved by installing insulation on the wall exterior. The simplest method is to use polystyrene board with an external render, or batts fixed between battens at around 600mm centers, covered with a waterproof cladding.

Page 144: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 128 REV 1.0

Shading

Direct sun can generate the same heat as a single bar radiator over each square meter of a surface, but effective shading can block up to 90% of this heat. By shading a building and its outdoor spaces we can reduce summer temperatures, improve comfort and save energy. A variety of shading techniques can help, from fixed or adjustable shades to trees and vegetation, depending on the building’s orientation as well as climate and latitude.

Shading glass is the best way to reduce unwanted heat gain, as unprotected glass is often the greatest source of heat entering a home. However, fixed shading that is inappropriately designed can block winter sun, while extensive summer shading can reduce incoming daylight, increasing the use of artificial lighting. Shading uninsulated and dark colored walls can also reduce the heat load on a building.

Figure 50 Heat Radiation

As per Figure 50, radiant heat from the sun passes through glass and is absorbed by building elements and furnishings, which then re-radiate it inside the dwelling. Re-radiated heat has a longer wavelength and cannot pass back out through the glass as easily. In most climates, ‘trapping’ radiant heat is desirable for winter heating but must be avoided in summer.

Figure 51 Shading To Reduce Heat Gain

Page 145: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 129 REV 1.0

Shading of wall and roof surfaces is therefore important to reduce summer heat gain, particularly if they are dark colored or heavyweight as shown in Figure 51. Light colored roofs can reflect up to 70% of summer heat gain.

Use external shading devices over openings, such as wider eaves, window awnings and deep verandas or pergolas. Lighter-colored shading devices reflect more heat, and those with light colored undersides make better use of daylight than dark colored. Internal shading does not prevent heat gain unless it is reflective: only shiny surfaces can reflect short wave radiation back through the glass without absorbing it.

To reduce unwanted glare and heat gain, use plants to shade the building, particularly windows. Evergreen plants are recommended for hot humid and some hot dry climates. For all other climates use deciduous vines or trees to the north, and deciduous or evergreen trees to the east and west.

Advanced glazing solutions can exclude up to 60% of heat compared to clear glass, and are a useful secondary measure on east and west elevations. They should not be used as a substitute for shading in hotter climates because only effective shading can exclude 100% of direct solar heat gain. Insulative glazing (e.g. double glazing) reduces ambient (conducted) heat gains.

Hot humid climates

In hot humid climates, it is essential to shade the walls year round and highly advantageous to shade the whole roof.

Shade all external openings and walls including those facing south.

Use covered outdoor living areas such as patios, balconies and deep balconies to shade and cool incoming air.

Use shaded skylights to compensate for any resultant loss of natural daylight.

Choose and position landscaping to provide adequate shade without blocking access to cooling breezes.

Use plantings instead of paving to reduce ground temperature and the amount of reflected heat.

Figure 52 Fly Roof & Ventilation

Figure 52 shows a ‘fly roof’, which can be used to shade the entire building. It protects the core building from radiant heat and allows cooling breezes to flow beneath it.

Shading and daylight

Choose shading methods that allow adequate amounts of daylight into the building while preventing unwanted heat gain.

Page 146: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 130 REV 1.0

Select plants that allow filtered light into the building. Design glazing to admit maximum light for minimum heat gain. Clear sections in veranda roofs

can be useful. Light colored external surfaces or shading devices reflect more sunlight into the building.

Depending on the situation this can be beneficial, or it can create unwanted glare.

Good orientation

We have already discussed the importance of site planning and locating the building in the most disaster-resilient area of the site. Now that you know the approximate location of the building it is important to consider orientation of the building itself. At this scale, orientation of the building is focused on reducing or excluding direct sun on the building and funneling or encouraging cooling breezes as much as possible.

Good orientation, combined with other energy efficiency features, can reduce or even eliminate the need for auxiliary heating and cooling, resulting in lower energy bills, reduced greenhouse gas emissions and improved comfort. It takes account of variations in the sun’s path as well as the direction and type of winds, such as cooling breezes.

Figure 53 Strategies for Good Orientation

Page 147: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 131 REV 1.0

Ideally, choose a site with good orientation for your climatic and regional conditions and build or repair to maximize the site’s potential for passive cooling. For those sites that are not ideally orientated, there are strategies for overcoming some of the challenges. In hot humid climates with no winter heating requirements, aim to exclude direct sun by using trees and adjoining buildings to shade every façade year round while capturing and funneling cooling breezes – Figure 53 shows how to do this with a house but the same applies to government infrastructure. Figure 54 shows in plan view how to capture and funnel cool breezes using trees and landscaping, balanced with the need to keep buildings clear from the hazard of falling trees during high winds.

Figure 54 Strategies for Good Orientation in Plan

Page 148: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 132 REV 1.0

Rainwater Harvesting System (Water Tanks)

Use these lists to guide the design of a rainwater system suitable for your property and planned rainwater uses. A rainwater harvesting system has the following components:

Roof and gutters

Collection system, including leaf-shedding rain-heads and first flush diverters

Tank

Supply system, possibly including pump and filters.

Figure 55 The components of a rainwater harvesting system

A ‘charged line’ system is needed if the pipe does not slope downwards along its length to the rainwater tank. The pipe can go down, often underground, and then up again, usually at the tank. The term ‘charge’ comes from the water being pushed up the pipe by the pressure of the water in the pipe.

Page 149: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 133 REV 1.0

Figure 56 Charged Line System In a charged line rainwater system the water is pushed into the tank by water pressure in the pipe.

Roof and gutters

Rainwater can be collected from most roof types, depending on the quality of rainwater required.

For garden or lawn irrigation:

ensure all gutters fall towards the outlets

preferably fit an effective leaf screen to the gutters

use gutter outlets that fit to the underside of the gutter.

For all other uses, also:

prevent vegetation from overhanging the roof

clean the roof and gutters before installing the system

fit a good quality leaf screen to gutters or use a leaf-shedding gutter.

from sections of roof containing lead flashing or asbestos sheeting— if they cannot be avoided, seal properly by preparing the surface and painting with a suitable potable-quality roof sealant, and do not collect rainwater from the first few rainfall events after sealing

in areas where airborne toxins are present from nearby activities such as crop-dusting and chemical processing.

Photovoltaic Systems (Solar Panels)

Present-day solar PV technology, a low-carbon energy solution, is well suited for much the Philippines as it has the ideal conditions for utilizing solar energy.

Most solar PV systems tend to be one of two types. The first type are utility-scale installations with a capacity usually above 1 megawatt (MW). They require large, open land areas with few shadows. The second type is distributed generation, which may be ground-mounted or installed on rooftops. They generate power during the day, while feeding surplus power back into the power grid. Residences can be sufficiently supplied with small systems of usually up to 20 kilowatts (kW), while larger public, commercial, and industrial buildings may have systems with a capacity as large as 1 MW.

Page 150: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 134 REV 1.0

Although much smaller in capacity than power plant-type installations, the rooftop solar system has many benefits in helping us change how we produce energy and make our world a better place to live. The benefits are summarized in Figure 57.

Figure 57 Benefits of Solar Power

Orientation (azimuth)

Solar modules produce most power when they are pointed directly at the sun. They should be installed so that they receive maximum sunlight. As a general rule of thumb for the northern hemisphere, install the solar modules to face south (towards the equator) to produce the most energy across the year.

Tilt angle (angle of elevation or plane inclination or altitude)

Generally for grid connected systems the tilt angle should be within 10° of the site’s latitude, to maximize the amount of energy produced annually. For example, in Tacloban City, at latitude 11˚ North, an acceptable installation tilt would be 21˚ from the horizontal.

Output power

The output power from an array is directly proportional to power received from the sun, which varies throughout the day and year. The rated maximum output of the module might be achieved only occasionally, depending on actual site conditions.

Page 151: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 135 REV 1.0

Case Study: Council House 2

For further understanding of how these items can be integrated to create a sustainable building system, refer to the References section on the soft copy of this manual which has a case study of Council House 2 in Melbourne (pictured below). Built in 2006 the workplace of City of Melbourne

(similar to Regional Office) sought to be innovative and use new sustainable technologies. As part of the process City of Melbourne created excellent resources to understand the different systems being

employed which are included in the Reference. Have a look and perhaps you will be inspired...

Figure 58 Council House 2 Facades

Carbon Zero, Carbon Positive

A long-term sustainable solution to global warming and climate change requires that we eliminate or substantially reduce the amount of carbon being emitted into the atmosphere from human (anthropogenic) activities. It can be achieved by creating carbon zero or carbon positive buildings.

Creating carbon zero and carbon positive homes cost effectively takes carefully planned application of the advice in several Your Home articles including Affordability, Passive solar heating, Passive cooling, and articles in the Energy section: Hot water service, Heating and cooling, Renewable energy and Smart meters, in-home displays and smart appliances.

The terms ‘carbon zero’, ‘carbon neutral’, ‘zero energy’ or ‘zero emission’ apply to buildings that use renewable energy sources on site to generate energy for their operation, so that over a year the net amount of energy generated on site equals the net amount of energy required by the building.

Page 152: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 136 REV 1.0

Figure 59 Carbon Positive, Neutral and Negative Equations

Carbon zero buildings are defined by the Australian Sustainable Built Environment Council (ASBEC) as having no net annual emissions from direct fuel combustion (e.g. burning natural gas) and electricity use from operation of building incorporated services3.

Building incorporated services include all energy demands or sources that are part of the building fabric at the time of delivery, such as the thermal envelope (and associated heating and cooling demand), water heater, built-in cooking appliances, fixed lighting, shared infrastructure and renewable energy generation.

Zero carbon buildings must meet specified standards for energy efficiency and on-site generation.

Compliance is based on modeling or monitoring of greenhouse gas emissions in kgCO2e/m2/yr.

Carbon positive moves beyond carbon zero by making additional ‘positive’ or ‘net export’ contributions by producing more energy on site than the building requires and feeding it back to the grid. Carbon positive projects can make significant contributions by helping to address the carbon intensity and damaging impacts of past building practices and lifestyles, and by offsetting situations where carbon zero homes are not possible.

While carbon zero is considered to be today’s benchmark of best practice, carbon positive buildings will play an increasingly important role in the future to limit global warming.

When ‘carbon positive development’ becomes the norm, it will be standard for all housing to offset the carbon emitted to make the house and produce the food, goods and services consumed in it, during its operational lifespan.

3 Riedy et al. 2011

Page 153: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 137 REV 1.0

Figure 60 Steps to Creating Carbon Zero Buildings

Creating a carbon zero building

The ASBEC definition of carbon zero buildings requires that all carbon emissions be offset by on-site renewable energy generation. It can be achieved relatively simply by installing an appropriately sized rooftop solar array or photovoltaic (PV) system (i.e. one that meets all current building needs) but that is often unaffordable.

Achieving carbon zero status cost effectively requires careful design and planning because, while the cost of PV installations has decreased markedly in recent years, this is still a relatively expensive way to offset carbon emissions compared to reducing your energy consumption.

Reducing the amount of energy you use and then increasing the efficiency of your building is the most cost effective place to start. If rooftop solar is not affordable at this time, you can still become carbon zero by subscribing to GreenPower or carbon offsets (see ‘Carbon offsetting’ below).

Design considerations

Designing a carbon zero building requires that each design solution be tailored to the specific location to maximize site advantages like solar or cool breeze access and diurnal temperature variations, or to identify alternative solutions when these are not available.

Designers should have an understanding of how to incorporate renewable energy sources on site and consider actual energy use — which is affected by both building features and occupant behavior.

Basic principles for designing carbon zero buildings include:

Incorporating energy efficiency strategies with renewable energy options from the outset of the project

Choosing a site that allows for renewable energy generation, passive solar heating and cooling, and food production, and reduces transport

Maximizing passive design strategies in the design of the home to reduce energy demand

Reducing water use — particularly hot water

Choosing appropriate materials that enhance the passive design strategy and have a low embodied energy

Locking in efficiencies

Page 154: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 138 REV 1.0

Maximizing energy efficiency significantly reduces the amount of renewable energy required to meet your needs without carbon emissions. This improves viability at three levels:

Physical — reduces roof surface area requirements for PV

Economic — needs a smaller capacity system

Environmental — uses fewer resources to manufacture system components.

For example, a typical Sydney Australia home uses around 5,000kWh of electricity per year. By applying the simple efficiency measures in the table on the next page, this can be reduced to 3,000kWh — and your PV system could cost 40% less. Energy savings of up to 80% are possible with carefully designed new homes and lifestyle modifications. System size varies depending on solar incidence in your region and array orientation and tilt angle. For further reading, some suggested case studies to look at for further information and ideas include MAT-TER Architects Guiuan National High School, and NCTU's Energy Efficient Evaporative Cooling Orchid House (inhabitat.com).

How BBB Sustainable Environmental Design Informs the Design Criteria

The list of BBB Sustainable Environmental Design suggestions above inform your project's design criteria in the same way that compliance requirements do. Without a legislated green code however, these are simply suggestions for how your LGU can begin to incorporate best practice into your infrastructure and positively impact your environment. Even if these are not affordable at the outset of the project it is useful to recognize what sustainability measures would be appropriate for each municipal building and documenting it. Similarly to incorporating compliance requirements this begins to build an understanding of the sustainability opportunities in your LGU and if documented clearly can be readily accessible when new funding opportunities arise.

As with compliance requirements, it is important to undertake the process of prioritization with each BBB Sustainable Design element – including any others your LGU deem relevant. For example your civic center might be situated on a large piece of land with ample space for water tank storage so you might nominate rainwater harvesting as the highest priority for inclusion. Alternatively your covered court with its large roof area might be oriented adequately for a photovoltaic system which could feed back into your grid or provide power to a neighboring municipal building. As with all design decisions at this early stage of the project, these priorities might shift as you design more detail or as you put pen to paper you may realize there are conflicts in elements which require re-prioritizing. This is a normal part of design and it is important to record each change to ensure documentation remains accurate but also to create a history of the project which provides solid reasoning for funding applications.

Page 155: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 139 REV 1.0

Analysis of Structure This section covers the Damage Analysis of the previously completed ‘Detailed Post Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection’ in Module 1, and this, combined with the Analysis of Function and Analysis of Land Use sections, should define:

The extents of the existing site that are to remain

The extents of the existing site that are to remain, but be rehabilitated

The extents of the existing site that are to be removed

The extents of new works (on the existing or new site)

Defining these extents completes the scoping phase of the project.

We can then progress with Concept Design for the new works identified, which is covered in the Concept Design section of this Module, and is developed further again in Module 3.

Damage Analysis Deciding on the event or combination of events that led to a building failing is crucial to ensure that in rebuilding, that building is more resilient to those failure mechanisms, as well as others that may not have occurred in this event. For each infrastructure element, the damage analysis informs what building back better is, and it may not necessarily always result in specifying more bolts, more welds, larger columns, larger steel truss members etc. Quality construction and maintenance play a big part in resilient infrastructure, alongside appropriate planning, design and material selection4. Failure Forces Structures are subject to forces induced from within themselves i.e. dead weight, but are also subject to applied loadings external sources. Earthquakes induce shaking, lateral movement and torsional forces, whereas Typhoons apply pressure from strong winds (both upward and downward pressure) and inundation or impact loadings.

Failure categories and examples Failure is usually due to either individually or a combination of the following:

Improper design

Poor/insufficient quality of materials

Poor workmanship/improper construction works

Lack of maintenance works

Impact from an adjacent failure i.e. loading from a foreign object

4 JICA Report

Page 156: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 140 REV 1.0

Specifically, structural failures of reinforced concrete, steel and timber have to do with frame arrangements, element composition and element connections. Non-structural failures of ceiling and non-load bearing walls have to do with connection and composition. Below are four examples of failure analysis following Typhoon Yolanda and Bohol Earthquake of 20135. Further examples (demonstrated in Appendix D) include the following causes of failure:

Irregular structural design of framing, inviting unexpected force and stress

Poor connections i.e. RC to RC, RC to CHB, Steel to Steel.

Poor composition of concrete including smooth aggregates, voids and non-standard reinforcing arrangements

Poor quality CHB

Deterioration of Steel and Timber members due to non-maintenance

Improper fixing of internals

Figure 61 Improper Structural Design in Municipal Building of Sagbayan, Bohol

Source: JICA, 2014

In Figure 61 the beams of canopy were not attached to main structure in a consistent manner and were connected to a beam at points without support of columns.

5 JICA Report

Page 157: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 141 REV 1.0

Figure 62 Improper Design and/or Construction in Tanauan National High School, Leyte Source: JICA, 2014

Figure 63 Improper Design and/or Construction in Tanauan National High School, Leyte Source: JICA, 2014 In Figure 62 the CHB gable walls have collapsed and in Figure 63 there is insufficient longitudinal reinforcing in the roof truss. These failures may have been caused by improper designs (load estimation or design strength is not appropriate) or construction might not have complied with the designs.

Page 158: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 142 REV 1.0

Figure 64 Timber failure to due to inadequate design Multi-purpose Hall, Tabon-Tabon, Leyte

Source: ASSURE, 2014

Figure 64 shows inadequate cross-bracing.

Figure 65 Purlin to Roof sheeting connection failure at Public Market, Tabon-tabon, Leyte

Source: ASSURE, 2014

Figure 65 shows roof sheeting removed by typhoon winds due to failure of purlin to roof sheet connection.

Page 159: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 143 REV 1.0

These examples are by no means an exhaustive list of potential failure mechanisms References from JICA have been provided in Appendix D to give further examples, and discussion of other references is provided in the box below.

Damage Analysis: Where do I begin? You are trying to decide why the failure occurred, so , using the ‘Detailed Post Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection’ from Module 1, decide which combination of the following occurred:

Improper design

Poor/insufficient quality of materials

Poor workmanship/improper construction works

Lack of maintenance works

Impact from an adjacent failure i.e. loading from a foreign object

This process might trigger other questions, like: What was the existing roof truss/concrete column designed for i.e. was it designed at all? What condition was it in before the disaster i.e. for timber, when was the last time it was sprayed for termites, or for steel, when was it last painted? It is worth noting that worldwide, after most disasters a document analyzing failure will be released by an appropriate Technical Working Group. FEMA (The United States Federal Emergency Management Agency), for example, is a good source of analysis conducted in the US, and documents such as these can be good references when conducting your own failure analysis.

Using Damage Analysis to define the extent of reconstruction works required Damage Analysis defines why individual elements or connections failed. Now we need to use that information to decide what portions of the existing building are salvageable i.e. could be repaired to achieve a build back better solution vs what needs demolition (and replacement with a build back better solution). In deciding whether repair is appropriate vs total demolition, it’s worth asking the following questions:

For how far does the damage extend?

How would you connect the new to the existing, does this involve further disturbance of the existing, will this further disturbance result in additional demolition works such that the result will significantly damage the existing, resulting in total demolition being required?

What’s the condition of the existing structural element you are connecting to? Based on your inspection of the element, do you believe it is designed and constructed to NSCP, such that it will effectively support the replacement element for the design life of the replacement?

Page 160: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 144 REV 1.0

Documentation of extent of reconstruction works required from Damage Analysis Mark up a set of sketches (potentially use the same sketches you used for your Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection in Module 1) with notes and hatching showing:

Existing elements that are to remain as is

Existing elements that are to remain, but require rehabilitation

Existing elements that are to be removed

New elements

The outcomes of these sketches can then be entered in the Design Criteria Form. Examples of the sketches described are given on the following pages.

Page 161: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 145 REV 1.0

Page 162: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 146 REV 1.0

Page 163: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 147 REV 1.0

Page 164: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 148 REV 1.0

Design Criteria

Module 2 Form 1

Purpose of the form: To document the extent of scope in the project – this includes extent of land use or site works; extent of building upgrades and functional improvements; and extent of repair needed (if rehabilitating an existing damaged building). For more information on the processes suggested for filling out this form, refer to 'Module 2: BBB Project Scope' and specifically the section titled 'Design Criteria'. To successfully fill out this form you will also need your completed Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection (refer to Module 1: BBB Pre and Post-Event)

Project Information

Region:

Province:

City/Municipality:

Barangay:

Building Name:

Building Address:

Building Contact Person:

Contact Person’s Address:

Contact Person’s No.:

Current Building Compliance

When was the building structurally designed i.e. to what version of the NSCP?

________ Does it comply with the current NSCP? Yes / No

Capacity: How many people use the building formally? How many people use the building informally?

________ ________

Does it comply with current regulations?

Yes / No Yes / No

Amenities: No. of male washrooms No. of female washrooms No. of PWD washrooms

________ ________ ________

Does it comply with current regulations?

Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No

Inclusive design: Ramps Accessible Wash Rooms Gender Safe Spaces (VAW Desk) Breastfeeding Room

________ ________ ________ ________

Does it comply with current regulations?

Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No

Electrical: In Out

________ ________

Does it comply with current regulations?

Yes / No Yes / No

Drainage: Does it comply with current

Page 165: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 149 REV 1.0

In Out

________ ________

regulations? Yes / No Yes / No

Water Supply: In Out

________ ________

Does it comply with current regulations?

Yes / No Yes / No

Fire Requirements: No. of fire escapes Sprinklers, hydrants or fire Hoses

________ ________

Does it comply with current regulations?

Yes / No Yes / No

2. Land Use Decisions Have you collected the information that you need to determine what hazards may affect your site?

Have you analyzed the information to make informed decisions on where to place the building or implemented design solutions?

Have you involved the community?

Is it consistent with your CLUP? Has the site and building design taken into account the appropriate zoning requirements? For your building, have you chosen an appropriate finished floor level (FFL) for the zone/specific site if in an area likely to be subject to flooding?

Have you updated your CLUP to reflect new information?

Has access and egress been considered to the site (particularly as to how to access a site during of after an emergency/calamity event).

Relocation/reposition on site/ design modification required

Functional Decisions

List items (in order of priority) you have decided to include in this project and the code it complies with. You may have more or less than five of each category so edit the form accordingly.

Category Items (in order of priority) Code for Compliance

Community Needs 1. ________________________________________

2. ________________________________________

3. ________________________________________

4. ________________________________________

5. ________________________________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

Compliance Requirements

1. ________________________________________

2. ________________________________________

3. ________________________________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

Page 166: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 150 REV 1.0

4. ________________________________________

5. ________________________________________

_____________________

_____________________

Best Practice Design 1. ________________________________________

2. ________________________________________

3. ________________________________________

4. ________________________________________

5. ________________________________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

_____________________

Building Structure Decisions

Element 1. Partial Repair or 2. Total Replacement?

Works required? 1. Existing – to be removed/demolished 2. Existing – to remain as is 3. Existing – to be rehabilitated 4. Proposed

Roof eg. 1 eg. 1, 2, 4

Frame eg. 1 eg. 1, 2, 3, 4

Openings

Internals

Special Items Pls specify: ___________

Prepared by: Reviewed by:

Signature: _________________ Signature: _________________

Name: ____________________ Name: ____________________

Role: _____________________ Role: _____________________

Page 167: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 151 REV 1.0

Concept Drawings and Documents

Now that you've spent the time understanding the site and project limitations, and investigated the cause of the building failure, and requirements and identified the opportunities relevant to this project it is time to convert this information into a set of concept drawings and documents. That is, from the defined design criteria, it is time to develop a plan which defines how the design criteria will be met.

If certain criteria cannot be met, justification for their exclusion should also be furnished. This plan should not focus on details, but provide a broad overall understanding of the design.

At the Concept Stage it is expected that broad decisions about shape and material choice will be made, this is what we will cover in concept design and drawings section. Further detailed decisions will be made in Module 3. Any decisions that have been made need to be clearly communicated in drawings and the Concept Design Decisions Form. Information cannot be communicated effectively and without mis-understanding unless it is clear and simple.

At this stage of the project, you are communicating to the person who will develop these ideas into more detailed designs (perhaps yourself but perhaps a draftsperson or consultant) as well as to the DILG – or other funding sources - who will be interested in design decisions and the scope of the project to ensure accurate and sufficient funding. It is important to remember the purpose of the drawing is not to communicate what the finished project will look like but rather what works are required to be developed for the project – this includes extent of demolition and differentiating between existing and proposed.

Concept Design of New Elements In this section we discuss the process of choosing material types and shapes for the new elements to be included in the project. These elements will be developed and detailed further in Module 3, ‘Detailed Design’.

Similar to the Design Criteria Section, there is a Concept Design Decisions Form, which should be used in conjunction with this section to progressively document Concept Design Decisions as you work through this section.

At the end of the concept design process you should have enough information to be able to sketch up your Concept Drawings (by hand or CAD) as well as furnish the Concept Design Decisions Form.

Considerations for Selection of Material Types

When making decisions regarding material type and shape, we naturally start to consider the design life, supply, and quality and maintenance considerations of what we are proposing. Below is a table listing the potential problems that might come up during this decision process versus which material types encounter these issues.

Table 5 Supply, quality and maintenance considerations for materials

Issue Steel Timber Concrete CHB

Availability and delivery lead times X X

Page 168: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 152 REV 1.0

Pre-fabrication lead time X X

Manufacturing Quality Control/Certification Enforcement

X X X X

Capability of local workforce to construct X X X X

Maintenance Considerations X X X X

Table 6 Maintenance requirements per material

Material Maintenance Requirements

Timber Termite treatment, replacement of rotten/split pieces.

Concrete/CHB Patching of cracked/worn sections to prevent water ingress/deterioration. Replacement of deteriorated blocks.

Steel Painting to prevent rust and corrosion. Replacement of rusted members.

How do I decide which material I want to use?

What’s your plan for the life of the structure i.e. from supply, construction through to maintenance for X years?

For example, you are replacing your roofing system.

If you want a steel I beam curved roof truss because you appreciate it’s structural efficiency, minimal maintenance and ease of construction/limited on site supervision benefits then perhaps constructing a coco lumber temporary solution, while you wait for the 3 – 6 months for the fabrication and delivery time of your permanent structure is the best combination for short and long term benefits.

Or can you come up with a steel angle solution with BBB connection details and a plan to enforce material and connection inspections to achieve quality construction in a shorter timeframe negating the need for a temporary solution?

Or is hardwood available and is this, with BBB connections and a strategy to fund continual maintenance inspection and member replacements at, say, 10 year intervals, the best option for your project given the capability of your local workforce?

Material decisions have implications on achievable shape configurations and also on design loadings, which influence structural behavior. Loadings for differing material types are given in the NSCP. Applying design loadings, after you’ve made your material selection, is part of the detailed design process, discussed in Module 3.

Page 169: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 153 REV 1.0

TIMBER

Throughout this module, timber has been suggested as a suitable alternative to steel framing due to its non-corrosive properties (where spans and loadings allow) and for cladding as an alternative to CHB in some cases, specifically for its lower thermal mass. However not all timbers are suitable and timber is only a suitable alternative if the right species of suitable strength is specified for the applied design loads. Below is an excerpt from the NSCP Timber Chapter (for the full table refer to p689 in the NSCP which is in the soft copy of this manual under References)

Figure 66 Excerpt from NSCP Timber Chapter

Considerations for Design of Roofing

Curved Roofing

Figure 67 Visualization of Curved Roof Source: ASSURE, 2014

Page 170: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 154 REV 1.0

Figure 68 Detailed Section of Curved Roof with Parapets Source: ASSURE, 2014

As already discussed, BBB does not mean building back what was there before. It means using the opportunity to use better design, better materials and better construction to reduce damage and save lives – it means designing for the new normal of climate change and disaster resilience.

The roof design in Fig 1 & 2 is a suggested Barangay Hall roof design by GIZ and ASSURE. The curve makes the roof less susceptible to damage from strong winds; the curve shape has the effect of deflecting wind load over the roof, therefore decreasing the wind load per area. The parapets protect the roof from being lifted off. In a typhoon-prone area, eaves or roof overhang weakens the roof as it can create wind uplift, ripping the roof from the walls.

The impact a strong roof can have in a disaster is large, perhaps the largest of any building elements – but it is not BBB if you do not design, document and build the curve properly. If this element is appropriate for your project ensure it is designed properly (as discussed in Module 3). If it is not possible to design the curve accurately then consider a different roof shape – if a 'weaker' roof shape is designed, documented and built properly it will be stronger than a poorly designed 'strong' roof shape.

As discussed in BBB Sustainable Design rainwater harvesting is a cost effective sustainability measure that can greatly impact the cost of running your building. When designing a new roof, include guttering and downpipes for water collection system – see 'Eaves, Parapets & Gutters' below for more information.

Page 171: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 155 REV 1.0

Pitched Roofing

Very low or very steep sloped roofs are less resistant to wind forces and should be avoided. The suction over a roof is significantly influenced by the roof configuration A general rule of thumb is to design a roof’s slope to be between 30 and 45 degrees. Where roof is of a greater or lesser slope are desired, additional fastening systems should be designed to resist uplift loads (refer Module 3 for discussion on roof fixings).Figure 69 shows the different roof types and appropriate pitch.

Figure 69 Common Roof Shapes

Mono Pitch vs Gable vs Hip A wind tunnel testing of low rise building models with flat, gabled and hip roof shapes investigated pitch angles of 15, 20, 30 and 45 degrees. The 45 degree gable and hip roofs performed the best, with the hip roofs recording significantly less suction than their gabled counterparts.6

Eaves, Parapets, Gutters & Fascias

Figure 70 Buildings with and without eaves

6 D. Prasad, T. Uliate and M. Rafiuddin Ahmed, 2009, Wind Loading on Low-Rise Building Models with Different Roof Configurations, International Journal of Fluid Mechanics Research, School of Engineering and Physics, Faculty of Science and Technology, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji

Page 172: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 156 REV 1.0

Roof overhangs expose the underside of the roof structure to wind loads and increase the possibility of roof blow off as shown in Figure 70. Parapets are a good idea to further protect the connection of the roof to the wall and prevent uplift from wind.

At the concept design phase it is also important to understand the flow of rainwater from your building and around the site. You have already considered this when thinking about roof design, water storage and site planning. Gutters are another part of this design and need to be incorporated at the concept stage – gutters are essential in ensuring the desired flow of water from the roof, see Figure 71.

Figure 71 Guttering and Drain Pipes

Source: DILG, 2015

Figure 72 Simple Fascia Board Source: DILG, 2015

Page 173: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 157 REV 1.0

Figure 72 shows a simple fascia board which can serve to reduce the power of uplift from the wind if eaves are essential or the roof is exposed for example in a covered court or outdoor market. Decide if these are appropriate for your project.

Page 174: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 158 REV 1.0

Concrete Roofing

Concrete roofing can be a popular choice in the Philippines and they are good in that they require fewer fixings than truss and sheet pitched roofing and are less susceptible to uplift pressure due to the inherent dead weight (heaviness) of the concrete. However concrete have poor sustainability characteristics and are therefore not recommended as BBB designs – they have high thermal mass and trap a lot of heat within the building, are difficult to ventilate and have a high embodied energy.

Also, consider the need for adequate waterproofing (including sealing with ongoing maintenance) and drainage of a concrete roof

Considerations for Structural Frame Design At this stage of the project we are interested in defining what elements make up your structural framing system i.e. is it a concrete frame with non-structural CHB infill, or a steel frame with stud frame infill, or concrete columns with no infill for a market or covered court. This stage is about making the first attempt at where your footings, beams, columns and slabs will be located and what they will be constructed of. The details on sizing and connection are developed in Module 3.

A structural frame, needs to be exactly that, a frame, so ensure your solution is a load transfer aligned system of columns and ring beams to transfer load through columns to footings.

If using a concrete frame with CHB infill, remember to include lintel beams around your openings.

Considerations for Design of Openings

Windows and Doors (including Shutters)

New windows and doors will generally only be designed in new walls and it is important to consider the following:

Design small openings that do not weaken the overall integrity of the wall Ensure there is sufficient structure above the opening – a lintel Windows should be placed to optimize cool breezes Consider the style of window (casement, awning, sliding) for appropriateness in each

application Where possible, use a standard sized door throughout the project for ease of buildability and

cost efficiency. Ensure all doors are not less than 0.8m wide (clear) to allow for PWD. For entrance doors or large doors (and particularly glazed doors) minimize exposure to

elements. For example, reduce the glazing within a door or if absolutely necessary ensure large glazed sliding doors have a balcony overhang or awning above to provide some protection from strong winds.

Remember that glazing, if not insulated, laminated or double-glazed, allows a large amount of heat to enter the building, reducing the efficiency of active cooling techniques (ie air conditioning). It is important to balance the need for cool breezes and air flow through a building against heat gain through the glazing. This can be mitigated through shading sub-structures and other measures. Refer to BBB Sustainable Design and specifically 'Shading' for more detail.

Page 175: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 159 REV 1.0

Shutters

Figure 73 Detachable Window Shutters

Figure 73 shows detachable window shutters as designed by Assure. Design and document a shutter for each window specific to its size and ensure there is adequate fixings If using removable shutters, ensure there is secure storage for them when not in use – remember, if they're damaged in storage they will not be useful when a calamity is approaching and there will not be time to repair them.

Figure 74 Permanent Window Shutters - Roller Shutters

Page 176: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 160 REV 1.0

Figure 74 shows fixed window shutters. These might be more useful if security is an issue for your building or if you have the budget for all windows. Ensure they are not spanning too large a distance as they can easily be damaged in strong winds if too large. Speak to a manufacturer about recommended maximum spans and sizes.

Considerations for Design of Services

Drainage, Sewerage, Water Supply, Electrical, Fire, Communications (telephone and internet)

For each of the listed services, at this stage of the project we are interested in defining:

The Existing Supply

The Future Demand

The reticulation required

If we are connecting into existing network or providing a stand-alone system

If that stand alone system has any large infrastructure requirements such as a sprinkler system (fire) or a storage tank (water supply and sewerage).

For each of the listed services, you have documented the existing conditions in either the Detailed Post-Event Infrastructure Damage Inspection or the Basic Information of the Design Criteria. From that raw data and referring to the appropriate standards (as outlined in the Design Criteria) you need to document what, if any, upgrades or new works are required. Services upgrades are essential and given their expense, it is important to get as accurate a scope as possible as early in the project as possible.

It is possible to not fully understand the condition of services at this phase of a project (for example if they are buried) – they may need investigation that can only happen once construction has started for example.

In the project scoping stage it is important to include as much information as you have and based on information you do have available document what is most likely to need to happen. Also, document upgrade works that are required for future-proofing of services. This project may not include the provision of telephone or internet but if you are already upgrading switchboards it may be cost effective to include telephone and internet connections in the works which will be fitted off in a later project once funding has been sourced.

Considerations for Design of Groundworks

Earthworks

Document clearly the expected scope of earthworks required i.e. do you need to do earthworks for any of the following items::

Excavation and/or fill for building footprint

Retaining walls

Trenching of services

Drainage

Septic tank

Excavation for water storage tanks

Page 177: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 161 REV 1.0

Footings

Consider water table level and if deep footings are appropriate or if we should consider a raft slab.

Consider existing soil types and any settlement issues between new works and existing structures.

Considerations for Design of Internals Partitions In the project scoping phase it is not necessary to have full details for partition construction types but it is necessary to understand and document the scope of general partition works including:

Framed – metal or timber stud framing Masonry – size of masonry Insulation – document insulation type (based on frame type) Openings – document extent and type of doors and windows Cladding type – plasterboard, fiber cement sheet (for wet areas), plywood or other Wall finish – document areas of different wall finishes such as paint, tiling or other cladding Skirting and Cornices – document whether there are skirting boards or cornices and their type

Ceiling Similarly to partitions it is important to include some details including:

Finished Ceiling Height – this is important to document early as it impacts on height of walls, amount of building material and in some cases on stairs and ramp requirements

Suspended tile system or suspended set ceiling Insulation – if the ceiling sits separately to the roof or for ceilings not on the top story of a

building insulation is necessary above the ceiling Material – plasterboard, fiber cement sheet, plywood Finish – paint or other

Floor coverings The most common floor covering in the Philippines is tiles. At the project scoping stage it is unlikely you will have chosen the exact floor tile to be used but you can still document the following:

Tile type – fully vitrified ceramic, terracotta or other Approximate size – you may wish to specify a particular sized tile early in the project Other floor coverings – polished concrete, timber floorboards or other. These will have an

impact on substrate required as well as costing so it is important to document this early

Fixtures and Fittings Fixtures and fittings such as faucets, basins, toilet pans, locks, handles and handrails may not have been chosen at project scoping phase and it is not necessary that they are. However any decisions that have been made should be included in the Design Criteria form for documentation to take into Module 3. Things to consider at the scoping phase are:

Lighting – specify LED light fittings, preferably that are programmable so can be automatically switched off when not in use

Faucets & wet area fixtures – specify water-saving shower heads and faucets to minimize the use of water

Basins, toilet pans & urinals – specify dual-flush pans and fixtures with low embodied energy if possible. Be sure to specify PWD accessibly basins and pans where required as well as sufficient handrails and grab rails.

Locks – if your LGU has standard locking requirements across all infrastructure, document it in the Design Criteria

Page 178: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 162 REV 1.0

Concept Design Decisions Form

The final element to complete in the project scoping phase is the Concept Design Decisions Form. This is a very basic list of items that you have recognized will be included in your project and will need detailed design completed for (refer Module 3). This is essentially a simplified version of what will later become your POW. You do not have enough detail to complete an accurate POW yet as you need to confirm your scope items (refer module 3) but some decisions have been made that require documentation.

Drawing List

The first step is to create a list of all the drawings needed to convey the information sufficiently. This list will be different at different stages of a project so a different (more detailed) drawing list will be discussed in Module 3. Different drawings communicate different information, which will be discussed below, so it is important to include the right drawings in your set. Firstly, gather any drawings that already exist and evaluate whether they are accurate (if it's a post-disaster repair project it's unlikely that previous drawings will show the damage incurred by the calamity). If they are accurate then include them as the existing drawings in your new drawing set.

In order to determine what drawings are required, it is important to consider what information needs to be communicated. If it is a new building existing drawings won't be required. If it is a partial repair, perhaps existing and proposed can be differentiated on the one drawing (by using dashed lines, different line weights or clear notes). If your project has a particular element that cannot be communicated in the below drawings, you require an additional drawing that will. Similarly, if your project is a simple replacement of damaged windows you may not require sections, but you would still require plans (to show the location of the damaged windows) as well as elevations (to show the style, shape and elevational location of the windows). Below is a minimum list of required drawings at the Project Scoping stage:

Municipality Plan Site Plan (existing + proposed) Floor Plan (existing + proposed) – one per floor Section x 2 (existing & proposed) Elevation x 4 (existing & proposed) What other drawings are required to communicate the specific design elements for this

project? For example: a landscape plan if there is a retaining wall; a civil plan if there is new drainage works; or a demolition drawing if existing elements must be demolished before new work can begin in the same place.

Titleblock Elements

Now that you have your drawing list and know how many drawings are required you need to set up a titleblock which will be identical across all drawings. A titleblock is an essential item on every drawing as it tells the reader vital information about that particular drawing. Before discussing drawing content it is essential to ensure the drawing you are looking at is the most current – this saves miscommunication caused by looking at old drawings after revisions have been made. Further, by filing superseded

Page 179: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 163 REV 1.0

drawings (either physically or virtually) an accurate titleblock allows for a history of design decisions and project progression to be tracked very easily.

Whether it is a computer or hand drawing the titleblock contains the same information. Figure 75 shows the template titleblock for the first page of drawings (the municipality plan). Figure 76 shows the template for all subsequent pages in the concept design drawing set. Figure 75 has been marked to show the use of each element and the titleblock elements are the same for subsequent pages.

Figure 75 Example Titleblock 1

Revision number and date. Anytime a drawing is revised a new revision number should be added with the date and drawings re-issued to relevant people.

Locate the north point as relevant to each project. North should be as close to directly up the page as possible but the building must remain square to the page.

This changes with each phase of the project. For drawings in module 3 this titleblock should read as ‘Detailed Design’

Provide a scale. If drawings within the page are different scales, write ‘Varies’ in this section and note scale on each drawing

Notes or legend section for general notes and any symbols used

Not all approvals may be necessary at Concept Design Stage. If not applicable write ‘Not Applicable’ in the box

Page 180: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 164 REV 1.0

Figure 76 Example Titleblock 2

Drawing Content

As mentioned above, each drawing serves a different purpose and can communicate different information. Below is a brief breakdown of what particular drawings generally communicate but as also mentioned above it is important to ensure the specifics of your project are communicated, and if they are not, then to find a drawing that will.

Municipality Plan Also called a vicinity or location plan and shows the location of the project in relation

to the municipality. It is normally at a smaller scale than the rest of the drawings as it shows a larger area. Use this drawing to locate other important infrastructure, landmarks or services in relation to your project and note any connection or requirements from/for these surrounding elements.

Concept Site Plan The site plan shows the site layout and incorporates everything that happens on the site, not just the physical building. It includes all services in and out of the site and locates the building on the site.

Concept Floor Plan The floor plan shows the layout of the building including openings and general flooring materials as well as callouts or location markers of sections and elevations.

Concept Sections Sections also show the layout of the building but give detail on the vertical elements such as ceiling heights, roof shape and openings. It is important to cut two sections perpendicular to each other to properly show the roof shape, ceiling heights and slab.

Concept Elevations Elevations provide general information about the external facades of the building. They show opening locations, roof shape, relationship of building to the ground and external materials.

Page 181: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 165 REV 1.0

At the project scoping or concept stage of a project the minimum information required on each drawing includes:

Dimensions Overall dimensions such as room sizes and opening sizes. Any critical dimensions that must be achieved such as maximums, minimums or existing dimensions.

Labeling Room labels or names

Notes Notes should indicate general materials. For example an exact floor tile may not have been specified but you know that you will be specifying a ceramic floor tile so the note will read 'Ceramic Floor Tiles'. Notes at this stage also include any information that cannot yet be drawn but needs to be included.

Difference between existing and proposed

Drawings must clearly communicate the difference between existing and new works to clearly define the scope of the project. You can differentiate a number of different ways but the most common are to use dashed or grey lines for the existing or to use very clear notes.

You'll notice that 3-dimensional visualizations are not listed as minimum requirements for communicating the scope of the project. They can be a useful drawing for the community or for marketing purposes but do not effectively communicate the scope of the project to the designers, the builders nor the funding agents. They can certainly still be included but only after minimum requirements have been met. Not creating a 3-dimensional drawing can save a lot of time, time that can be used progressing your design or ensuring the documentation is as accurate as possible.

Figure 77, Figure 78 and Figure 79 are drawings from a RAY project in Abuyog that are good examples of Concept Drawings. Below they have been marked to indicate strengths as well as areas for improvement.

Figure 77 Example Concept Municipality Plan

Shows proposed works that are close but not in proposed sub-project

Clear and concise notes Clearly marks

different site locations

Page 182: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 166 REV 1.0

Figure 77 Is a strong example of the municipality plan at the concept design stage. This is the plan that can easily show proposed or existing works that lay outside this sub-project’s site boundary but affect it. To make it a BBB Concept Drawing, this plan could also identify hazards or other information outlined in the CLUP.

The next drawing in the set was a floor plan however there should be a site plan between the municipality plan and floor plans. This site plan would show the sub-project site in more detail and include any works within the site including landscaping, retaining walls and services – existing and proposed. The site plan is also the drawing that should clearly indicate areas of demolition and/or staging if required.

Figure 78 Example Concept Proposed Floor Plans

Figure 78 is a great example of floor plans at the concept design stage. A few things could be added that would make them BBB drawings including:

Differentiation between existing and proposed works

Demolition and or staging of works if either are required

General notes explaining construction types

Overall dimensions – needed for all rooms

Room labelling

General construction shown in drawing but requires notes or a legend to explain construction type.

Excellent example of Concept Phase note – clearly explains material type without requiring detail

Page 183: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 167 REV 1.0

Figure 79 Example Concept Proposed Elevation

Figure 79 shows the front elevation of the building and is a good concept drawing however there should be drawings for each elevation which clearly show extent of works. Remember, a drawing does not communicate the finished building it communicates the scope of works included in the project.

Excellent example of Concept Phase note

Roof pitch should be noted

Key heights are shown but also needs a floor level and ground line – these need to be given values to understand the difference in levels

Windows should be located (with dimensions) and shutters noted

Materials and wall finishes should be noted

Page 184: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 168 REV 1.0

BBB Project Scope Finalization Do you have all required documents?

You will need the Design Criteria Form, Concept Design Decisions Form and your Concept Drawings at a minimum. You may also require further documentation if these forms don't adequately communicate the concept design of your sub-project. Internal Review of Documents

Perform a review of the documents within your LGU. This review should include all relevant parties – example for Municipal Engineer, MPDC, Municipal Architect and MLGOO – and review the decisions made and prioritization of elements within the concept design. Do you have a hard and soft copy for LGU to keep on file?

This will protect your documents from being lost in the event of a disaster and will also make the gathering of data easier in the future. Set meeting with DILG

Ensure relevant representatives from the LGU are available similar to the internal review – Municipal Engineer, MPDC, Municipal Architect and MLGOO. REVIEW WITH DILG PDMU ON SITE

This would run similarly to the Internal Review (Step 2) and give the DILG a chance for comment and review. DILG representatives will have seen a wide variety of sub-projects across the region and may be able to provide valuable advice for the improvement of your design. Similarly they may learn something from your LGU if you have prepared an innovative design that can be shared with other municipalities and improve the disaster resilience of the Region. The LGU is to run this review and it is suggested it take place at the site of the sub-project or include a site visit to the location. Having conducted the review, DILG can give full approval, conditional approval (if only minor amendments are required) or state the need for re-review (if major amendments are needed). Make amendments and revisions based on the review in a timeframe agreed to in Step 5. Re-review with DILG only if required

Assess whether a re-review is required. Perhaps a phone conversation or emailing of the drawings will suffice rather than waiting for a DILG representative to be available to attend site. PROCEED TO MODULE 3.

Page 185: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 169 REV 1.0

Concept Design Decisions Module 2 Form 2

Purpose of Form: To outline design decisions made at project scoping and concept design phase. These design decisions are made based on Design Criteria and information provided in Module 2: BBB Project Scope. For more information on how to fill this form out, refer to Module 2: BBB Project Scope and specifically the section titled 'Concept Design, Documents & Drawings'. This form is a written version of your concept design drawings so ensure it is updated to reflect concept design drawings if changes are made.

Project Information

Region:

Province:

City/Municipality:

Barangay:

Building Name:

Building Address:

Building Contact Person:

Contact Person’s Address:

Contact Person’s No.:

Concept Design Decisions

Item Required Y/N

Code for Compliance

Material Selected

Concept Design Notes

Roofing & Framing Trusses Roof Sheeting

Structural Frame

Openings Windows Doors Shutters

Services Drainage Channels Pit and pipe

reticulation Sewerage Reticulation Septic Tank

Water Supply

Page 186: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 170 REV 1.0

Reticulation Tank

Electrical Reticulation Circuit Boards Generator

Fire Reticulation Other

Communications (telephone & internet) - Reticulation - Other

Earthworks Cut/fill Footing excavation Septic tank Service trenching

Internals Partitions Ceiling Floor coverings Fixtures & Fittings

Special Items Pls Specify:_______________

Prepared by: Reviewed by:

Signature: _________________ Signature: _________________

Name: ____________________ Name: ____________________

Role: _____________________ Role: _____________________

Page 187: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 171 REV 1.0

MODULE 3: BBB DETAILED DESIGN, DOCUMENTATION

DEVELOPMENT AND VERIFICATION PROJECT STAGE: PLANNING AND DESIGN

This section of the BBB Operations manual covers:

■ BBB Detailed Design and Confirmation of Scope Items

■ BBB Documentation Development i.e. POW, BoQ/Detailed Estimate, Schedule, Drawings and Technical Specification (including inspection and testing requirements)

■ LGU and DILG Verification of BBB Documents

This module takes the Design Criteria Form , Concept Drawings and Concept Design Decisions Form created in Module 2, and develops them through a design development, scope

confirmation and documentation process to become a complete set of documents either ‘For Construction’ if procurement is by contact, or ‘For procurement’ if the procurement is by

administration. This module also covers the Internal LGU Verification and DILG Verification process of these documents, to limit occurrences of ‘Building Back Same’ as opposed to

‘Building Back Better’. In order to stop the cyclic destruction and reconstruction, designing, documenting and verifying of resilient solutions needs to take place as these are keys steps in a

resilient reconstruction process.

Page 188: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 172 REV 1.0

z

Page 189: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 173 REV 1.0

Detailed Design and Confirmation of Scope Items Introduction to this section Why do I need to develop my design and confirm my scope items before I develop my documentation?

In Module 2, you analyzed the Land Use, Functionality and Structure for the site, and came up with a Design Criteria, Concept Drawings and List of Concept Design Decisions. In this module we will work through the details of how we need to build our structure back to achieve the intent agreed in Module 2, and to do this we need to do some detailed design to confirm our scope items. The focus in this section is on the detailed engineering design of the elements. It’s important to confirm scope items before the documentation gets developed to limit redundant work.

How much time and how much detail do I go into?

This depends on how large the scope of work is, which you should have defined (to a degree of certainty) in Module 2. For example, the full rebuilding of the 2nd storey of an existing structure is a different scale of repair to patching of some existing roof sheeting , some painting and some concrete patching. The outcome of your Concept Design conducted in Module 2, will determine the extent of Detailed Design required in your build back better solution.

What does it involve?

For different infrastructure types, different degrees of detailed design are required. And again, for different scales of rebuilding, different levels of analysis will be appropriate. Valid assumptions, hand calculations and 3d model analysis are all options to consider.

What tools are available?

The following sections provide a discussion on detailed design analysis and options to consider. If you don’t have the knowledge, skills or experience to handle the degree of design required, identify this and seek assistance from a more specialized resource.

ASSURE (Alliance for Safe and Sustainable Reconstruction) is a Philippines volunteer organization that could be of assistance to you. They support LGUs through GIZ .

Page 190: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 174 REV 1.0

Detailed Design Detailed Design is making the next level of decisions to progress from Concept Documents and the Design Criteria in Module 2, to being able to document these decisions at a ‘For Construction’ level, which is covered in the next section of this module.

For each infrastructure type, i.e. Structural, Services, Internals and Groundworks there is analysis that needs to take place combined with material and connection decisions.

The DPWH and DILG adopted the Minimum Performance Standards and Specifications for Public Buildings (MPSSPB) for RAY infrastructure projects. It is assumed these will apply (and continue to be updated) for future public works and as such, refer to this as the overarching specification, supplemented by references within it and any other Philippines National Codes.

As in Module 2, we need to ensure that in developing our design towards our BBB solution we continue to consider implications of design life, material supply, material quality, maintenance requirements and the capability of the local workforce to complete the construction to the required quality that will ensure the resilience intent is realized.

How detailed design needs to address causes of failure, and can be used as a preventative tool against poor material quality and poor workmanship

Example: Structural frame being reconstructed in same location

Figure 80 Tabon-Tabon Gym/Multipurpose Centre

Source: ASSURE, 2014

Scenario 1 If you believe your structure failed because of a combination of inadequate design, poor construction and zero maintenance, your BBB strategy must address each of these issues, and conducting

Page 191: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 175 REV 1.0

structural analysis is the first step to handling the inadequate design issue. Even if the frame was partially damaged you need to model the whole structure to see how the building performs as a whole, and then design each individual new element using the resultant forces.

Note: Although this may seem like a lot of work, we must remember that codes and guidelines exist to ensure that the safety and best interests of our community are at the core of our development decisions. If we don’t know what our building is designed for, how can we provide informed advice to our community about when it could be used as an evacuation center, for instance? Knowing your infrastructure (and it’s design limits) is crucial to good DRRM .

Scenario 2

If you have documentation that shows that your structure was designed to code, but was poorly constructed and poorly maintained, consider if detailed design is required to build more redundancy into the design i.e. to allow for poor construction and poor materials and limited supervision. Alternatively , you can consider if increased supervision during construction (specifically inspection and testing at identified milestones) is an option, which combined with the current design would address the cause of failure and if so, perhaps changes to the detailed design aren’t required.

Note: Designing your structure for a perfect world isn’t useful when it’s applied in an imperfect one. The best engineering solutions are the ones that prevent failure, so if, for the foreseeable future, you believe there will be no maintenance of your structure, design your solution with increased durability criteria to counteract that ‘known condition’. For example, an increased steel section thickness or epoxy paint on steel. Similarly, if you understand that for the foreseeable future quality of construction supplies and workmanship may be substandard, build redundancy into your design to allow for a reduction in material quality, for example, an increased concrete cover requirement or enlarged column section.

Scenario 3

If you have documentation that your structure was designed to code, constructed to standard and maintained appropriately, and was damaged either due to impact from an object or an applied loading higher than the code criteria, then for this structural frame being reconstructed in the same location , there’s potentially not a lot design can assist with. There still may be scope for design intervention however, for example, the wind loading recorded in Typhoon Yolanda was higher than the NSCP wind loading and at the time of printing, it is understood that NSCP was under review.

Note: This is a case of reminding us that we can’t design and construct anything to be ‘disaster proof’, but that by ensuring we design to current codes, construct to current standards and maintain our structures to the best of our ability, we are as resilient as we can be when force de-majeure do occur.

The following section discusses the design requirements and options for each infrastructure type.

Page 192: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 176 REV 1.0

Structural Frame Considerations In Module 2 you should have decided what combination of framing and infill you would like to progress in this section. Now it’s time to structurally analyze that concept, work out any additional bracing required, size the members, and decide on connections.

Figure 81 Framing and Bracing for Steel and Timber Truss and Column combinations

Source: JICA, 2014

As shown in Figure 81 cross-bracing is required in both planes, transferring loads down aligned columns to footings.

Page 193: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 177 REV 1.0

Figure 82 General Macarthur Civic Centre

Source: AVID, 2014

Figure 82 is an example of a steel truss connected to concrete columns.

Figure 83 2-Storey Prototype Barangay Hall

Source: ASSURE, 2014

Figure 83 is an example of a full reinforced concrete frame.

Conduct your structural design in accordance with the MPSSPB and National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP).

At the time of printing it is understood that a new revision of the NSCP is imminent as at July 2015, including an increased wind loading requirement following Typhoon Yolanda in 2013.

Remember, structural design involves both whole of structure analysis considering strength and serviceability and design of each individual member (and connections). It also requires either test

Page 194: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 178 REV 1.0

results or valid assumptions to be made about the soil types and associated bearing capacity of the soil for the structure’s overturning analysis to be completed.

If you don’t have the experience to conduct the analysis as required by the NSCP, you need to engage a specialist to do this. If your BBB strategy requires this step and you eliminate it, you’re limiting how effective your building back solution could be from the beginning, and you could be proceeding without addressing your cause of failure or without constructing your structure to the current code requirements (particularly as these may have changed since the initial design, or the design of other structures in your location).

Refer Appendix E for an example of a complete structural design for a Municipal Building by ASSURE.

Connection and fixing considerations This section provides for discussion on the following:

Fixings

o Roof sheeting to roof sheeting i.e. overlap

o Roof Sheeting to Purlin

o Purlin to Rafter/Truss

Connections

o Truss member to member

o Truss member to column

o Beam to Column

o Column to Footing

Roof sheeting overlap

Figure 84 Suggested corrugated roof sheet overlap dimensions

Source: JICA, 2014

Page 195: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 179 REV 1.0

Roof Sheeting to Purlins

Table 7 Comparison of common fixing types for use between Purlins and Roof sheeting

Type J-bolt Tek screw Umbrella Nail

Image

Applicability Steel and a modified version for timber.

Steel and Timber. Timber only.

Benefits and Risks

Provides restraint against uplift and downward pressure.

Provides restraint against upward and downward pressure, but only at the thread intersection with the roof sheet/purlin, and so is limited by the thickness of the roof sheeting and purlin.

Provides no restraint against uplift, other than the shear force from the initial protrusion into the timber.

BBB rating GOOD option available for steel and timber purlins (timber requires modified solution bent on site to suit timber purlin size).

OK for steel and timber purlins.

NOT RECOMMENDED

Source: JICA, 2014, Fastenal, 2015, Tradeholding, 2015

Table 7 is by no means an exhaustive list of types of fixings between purlins and roof sheeting. The key is to ensure whatever connection is proposed provides restraint against upward and downward pressure, and also has good durability properties along with a simple installation process.

Page 196: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 180 REV 1.0

Figure 85 Innovative BBB fixing arrangement for timber purlin to roof sheet- Guiuan Wet Market

Source: DILG, 2015

Figure 85 shows an innovative fixing solution from a specialized corrugated sheeting type to a timber purlin by use of an interim steel web system bolted to both the sheeting and the purlin.

Figure 86 J-bolt and Purlin Arrangement Figure 87 Roofing edging detail

Source: JICA, 2014

Figure 86 J-bolt and Purlin Arrangement Figure 87 Roofing edging detail

and Error! Reference source not found. can be used as a guide for detailed estimate quantities.

Page 197: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 181 REV 1.0

Purlins to Rafters

Figure 88 Timber Purlin to Rafter bolted cleat arrangement at Wet Market, Guiuan Source: DILG, 2014

Cleats are best to be bolted for timber and either bolted or fully welded for steel.

Nailed vs Bolted vs Welded Connections: Which is better and why?

For timber, a bolt is superior to a nail as it’s a through member connection that can be tightened, and replaced when required.

For steel, the reasoning behind the preference for bolted rather than welded connections is that achieving good welds is complex and easy to do poorly whereas bolted connections are simple to construct. Welded connections are also susceptible to failure by cracking under repeated cyclic loads due to fatigue.

Page 198: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 182 REV 1.0

Steel Truss Member to Member Connections

Figure 89 Gusset plates vs direct welding Source: JICA, 2014

Figure 90 Fully welded gusset plate (from below) Source: AVID, 2014

Figure 91 Fully welded gusset plates Source: AVID, 2014

Figure 89, Figure 90 and Figure 91 show fully welded gusset plates being used. This increases the weld contact area, making a stronger connection and limits the disturbance to the base material. Note in Figure 90, that the full weld occurs along the base of the steel angles also (not shown in Figure 90).

Page 199: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 183 REV 1.0

Figure 92 Bolted timber gusset plate detail from Wet Market, Guiuan Source: DILG, 2015

Figure 92 shows an example of timber gusset plates being used with bolted connections.

Steel Truss to Concrete Column Connections

Table 8 Comparison of connections between steel angle truss and concrete column

Type Base Plate with Anchor Bolts Hooked Reinforcing

Image

Benefits and Risks

Effective load transfer system due to weld to base plate and threaded cast in bolts.

Bolt/base plate have more allowance for movement than hooked reinforcing solution and will absorb some of this.

Bolt/base plate are of a stronger steel grade than reforcing steel.

Prone to sliding.

Ineffective load transfer to column.

When failure occurs, likely to rip out column.

Brittle failure of bent reinforcing. Very Rigid connection i.e. no allowance for movement.

If bent reinforcing is welded, degradation of reinforcing steel will occur as reinforcing steel is heated.

BBB rating GOOD NOT RECOMMENDED

Refer Appendix F for example calculations for a bolted connection.

Page 200: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 184 REV 1.0

As in Table 8, bolted connections are recommended for timber also.

Figure 93 Timber Connections to Concrete Source: DILG, 2014

Concrete Connections

Table 9 Reinforced Concrete member connections

Type Beam to Column Column to Footing, and column splicing

Image

Things to note

Allow for L bars and closer ligature spacing at connections

Splicing at Midspan, L bars through footing to column.

Source: JICA, 2014

Page 201: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 185 REV 1.0

Considerations for CHB Openings

Allow for trimmer bars/ties from your lintel beams, as in Figure 94 below.

Figure 94 Reinforcing details required around openings

CHB End Walls

Use a reinforced concrete lintel beam and column for CHB end walls, as shown in Figure 95.

Figure 95 CHB end wall reinforced concrete support beams and columns Source: JICA, 2014

Page 202: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 186 REV 1.0

CHB connections Ensure you detail your tie-in requirements from CHB to CHB and also from CHB infill to reinforced concrete frame, as shown in Figure 96.

Figure 96 CHB tie-bar requirements Source: JICA, 2014

Page 203: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 187 REV 1.0

Material Selection Considerations As discussed in Module 2, design life, quality, maintenance and supply need to be evaluated when making material decisions. Along with the considerations discussed in Module 2, the following provides a list of detailed suggestions which may achieve some of the BBB aims, remembering it is imperative to design to actual conditions and not perfect conditions.

Table 10 Suggested materials and benefits

For Material Option Benefit

Roof Sheeting

Thermoplastic sheeting if adjacent to coast.

Less prone to corrosion than G.I. sheeting.

Light colored roof sheeting Reflects heat.

Ribbed roof sheeting Performs better structurally.

Long span sheeting Less joints therefore less opportunity for water ingress.

Perpex panels Let natural light in and therefore reduce powered lighting requirements.

Roof system

Include insulation and associated sag-wire. Heat reductive.

Trusses Consider timber or if using steel, use with epoxy paint in coastal areas.

Timber and epoxy paint (on a steel truss) are more resistive to corrosion than a steel truss with lead paint.

I beam steel members More structurally efficient than steel angles and are quicker to install.

Page 204: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 188 REV 1.0

Considerations for Services In Module 2 you would have decided on supply and reticulation as well as if there is any other proposed infrastructure required for services i.e. tanks etc. Table 11 below lists the codes that are applicable for detailed design of the following systems:

Table 11 Codes per service System Code

Electrical Philippine Electrical Code (PEC)

Water Plumbing Code of the concerned city/municipality and/or National Plumbing Code of the Philippines

Sewerage Code on Sanitation of the Philippines, Plumbing Code of the Philippines

Fire Fire Code of the Philippines

Communications (Telephone and Internet) Republic Act 7925 Philippines Electronics Code

Drainage Plumbing Code of the Philippines

Considerations for Internals In Module 2 you made decisions about the general construction of internal elements of the building as well as general material types. Now you need to add the next layer of detail and make material selections for inclusion in the specification. For example, in Module 2 you may have elected for glazed tiles as the floor covering throughout. Now is the time to choose and document the exact tile type, finish, color and any other detail. The table below lists considerations in making material selections.

Table 12 Considerations for Internal Material Sections Element Selection Considerations

Partitions Specify and detail wall finishes, skirtings and cornices that complement each other and are easily constructable Where there is paint finish, specify non-lead based low VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) paints with low off-gassing and high sustainability characteristics

Ceiling Specify a ceiling thickness that will not warp and will join properly.

If there is a ceiling void (ie space between ceiling and roof) ensure you have specified ceiling insulation and roof insulation. Insulating both layers correctly will greatly reduce the amount of heat entering your building making it easier to keep cool. Suggested ceiling fixing is shown in

Figure 97 Example ceiling fixing solution Source: JICA, 2014 below.

Page 205: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 189 REV 1.0

Page 206: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 190 REV 1.0

Table 10 Considerations for Internal Material Selections Continued

Element Selection Considerations

Floor Covering Glazed tiles are extremely slippery – especially when wet – and although a common choice do not meet BBB requirements. When selecting a floor tile choose one with some texture or grip. Manufacturers should provide information about R-Values which is a rating on the slipperiness of the tile. Ensure it is an R-10 minimum and R-11 or 12 in wet areas.

Doors Choose a standard door size that can be used throughout the project or at least reduce the number of different doors to reduce costs.

Fixtures and Fittings

As outlined in the concept design phase of Module 2, specify fittings and fixtures that have low embodied energy and are energy or water saving. These fittings and fixtures may be more expensive initially than regular fittings and fixutres but are significantly cheaper than the running costs of less efficient options.

Special Items

Figure 97 Example ceiling fixing solution Source: JICA, 2014

Page 207: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 191 REV 1.0

Considerations for Ramps and Stairs Ramps Depending on the height of the ramp, which will be defined by the ground surface and the finished floor level of the building, you may choose to construct your ramp from CHB, reinforced concrete or timber. See Appendix G which contains detailed design calculations for a concrete ramp.

Stairs

It is understood stairs are subject to the Philippine cultural practice of ‘oro, plata, mata’, however we also believe for safety standardized tread and rise dimensions are required as per the NBCP. Perhaps increasing the floor height to allow for the required rise for the required number of stairs is the BBB solution here. Whatever the solution is, it can adhere to BBB principles as well as cultural requirements.

Scope Confirmation Having gone through the process of detailed design of the following:

- Structural Frame

- Connections and Fixings

- CHB

- Services

- Internals

- Ramps and Stairs

and having considered material decisions along the way, including design life, material quality, supply and maintenance requirements, it is now time to confirm our scope items.

Did anything change from your concept items of work decided in Module 2?

Are there additional Items of work required because of your analysis results or decision development?

Following this scope confirmation, we can move to the next stage of the project which is documentation development, covered in the next section.

What examples from your LGU can you add to this section to help learn from?

What went well?

What could be improved?

How could this improvement be achieved?

Page 208: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 192 REV 1.0

Documentation Development Introduction to this section WARNING: Before commencing this section you need to know (or decide) if you will be procuring the work by contract or by administration.

Why do I need to develop documents i.e. POW, Drawings, BOQ, Schedule and Technical Specification (including inspection and testing requirements)?

Documents help you plan your works and communicate your intent. They need development because we use them to progress from having an idea (in Module 2), to analyzing it (Module 3) , to documenting it (Module 3) to constructing it (Module 4). For example, the information you need to sketch up an idea, is less developed than what you need to analyze the structure, which is again less developed than what you need to construct it (such that the idea, and the details the analysis requires are realized). Works procured by contract have added emphasis in this phase as the documents developed here become locked as the basis of the contract. Note: What does this mean? It means if you ever want to question your contractor about time, scope, quality or cost, it will always come back to the bidding documents i.e. what was allowed for in the BAC and letted contract. Ensuring that you have communicated key time, quality and scope information in the project documents is crucial to ensuring you will be able to enforce your contract i.e. get what you designed, constructed. Good documentation allows you to use the powers you have under IRR 9184, like liquidated damages, defects periods etc, to resolve any contractual issues you come across during the construction phase. Not having the documentation means that these powers become extremely difficult to enforce.

How much time and how much detail do I go into? The more time and detail you put into your documentation, the less misunderstandings or misinterpretations that are likely in the construction phase. However, it’s not always a case of more is better, as development takes time, and costs money. You must consider that the documents are to aid the constructors in conjunction with your site inspections and so depending on how frequent and how experienced your site inspector is (along with your constructor), will influence the level of detail of your documentation. Note: By Contract vs By Administration Procurement by contract is less flexible in terms of level of detail and timing. Whatever documents are in the bidding package become the basis of the contract. Doing the works by administration gives the Municipal Engineer flexibility to stage the development of the some sections of the Specifications, for e.g. the inspection and testing requirements. These need to be decided before construction commences though.

What does it involve? o POW o Drawings o BOQ o Schedule o Technical Specifications, including inspection and testing requirements

Page 209: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 193 REV 1.0

The following sections of this Module outline specifics on each of these documents and present examples of them also. No matter how small a project, some version of each of these will be required before the procurement phase can commence.

POW

The POW is a summary page of the project. It’s a summary of the WHAT, WHEN, WHERE and HOW MUCH of the project. Every works item on the POW will have at least one drawing associated with it. It will also be at least one line on the Schedule, be expanded on in the BOQ and have a section in the Technical Specifications. The POW won’t be complete until the BOQ and Drawings are finalized. The Schedule may influence it i.e. you may choose different materials and modes of construction based on time constraints or availability of access to the building. At the time of writing this manual, DPWH DO 22 of 2015 Circular Series was the most current ‘Guidelines in the preparation of the Approved Budget for the Contract’. Note: By Contract The POW the LGU Engineer puts together gets superseded by the POW submitted by the contractor awarded the contract. It is then the contractor’s POW that get’s used and revised (if revisions are applicable) during the construction phase of the project. It’s the contractors POW that the contractor bills against and that the SWA is created against.

Figure 98 Breakdown of elements contained in a POW Source: LGU Leyte, Leyte, 2014

Page 210: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 194 REV 1.0

Common problems with POWs

Inappropriate units, results in issues when approving SWA.

Non-revision when changes are made, results in issues when trying to liquidate.

Not in accordance with the guidelines i.e. Contractor’s profit outside allowable range for value of project, results in non-approval and revision, which in turn creates delay.

In-consistency with other documentation.

Detailed Drawings These need to expand on the Concept Drawings you created in Module 2, to ensure enough information is conveyed for the constructor to be able to build your design intent.

Drawings are a pictorial way to define the extent of works i.e. what existing elements are being removed and the details on the new to be constructed. They combine with the Technical Specification to explain how you want things to be constructed. Note: Making yourself draw something brings out some of the issues you may have missed if you didn’t go through this process. Sets of drawings need to contain site wide information, element information and connection information.

Don’t leave out the details of connections! It’s where forces transfer and combine, where a large amount of failure and misinterpretation occurs and it's one example of where good BBB intent can turn into poor construction.

The scale of a drawing should be such that it is clear and legible. The scale is associated with the sheet size of the paper it is produced on, so, the size sheet you intend to use will determine what scales are appropriate.

Detailed Drawing sets need to cover the full scope of the project which could include sections on the following:

General i.e. Project Title, Site Development Plan, Vicinity Plan and General Notes

Architectural

Structural

Services i.e. Electrical, Plumbing and Sanitary, Fire, Communications

Groundworks i.e. Earthworks and any surface drainage

Appendix H contains Detailed Drawings by Assure (in partnership with GIZ and the listed LGUs), for the following projects:

Public Market (Basey, Samar)

Civic Center (Tabon Tabon and Alang Alang, Leyte)

Municipal Hall (Basey, Samar)

Fish Market Landing (Marabut, Samar)

Integrated Bus Terminal (La Paz, Leyte and Basey, Samar)

Evacuation Civic Center (Abuyog, Leyte)

Prototype 2 Storey Barangay Hall

Prototype 2 Storey Barangay Hall with Mezzanine

Prototype Expanding Evacuation Module

Page 211: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 195 REV 1.0

Appendix I also includes example Detailed Drawings from the NHA, which are example of the following (which aren’t covered in the above listed projects) :

Existing Site Plan

Proposed Site Plan General layout overlayed on existing site plan

Earthworks Plan Shows the level works required on the site.

Drainage Plan Shows the extents of surface and subsurface drainage required on the site

Earthworks Details

Drainage Details

An additional drawing that would be useful for all projects is a Demolition Plan, which could communicate to the constructor the extent of demolition works required on the site.

Table 13 to

Page 212: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 196 REV 1.0

Table 20 below provide a catalogue of BBB drawings by ASSURE, as a quick reference when looking for guidance on what plans or details for a variety of projects might need to include and how they might be presented. They also provide good examples of general and specific construction notes.

Table 13 Catalogue of Architectural Plans, Sections and Elevations contained in Appendix H

Drawing Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Civi

c Ce

nter

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fish

Mar

ket L

andi

ng

Arch

itect

ural

Pla

ns, E

leva

tions

and

Sec

tions

Floor Plan/s X X X X X X X

Roof Plan X X X X X

Detail Plan/s X X X X X X

Reflected Ceiling Plan per floor

X X X X

Front, Rear, Left, Right Elevations

X X X X X X X

Detail Elevation/s X X

Longitudinal and Cross Section/s

X X X X X X

Detailed section/s X X X X

Page 213: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 197 REV 1.0

Table 14 Catalogue of Architectural Details contained in Appendix H

Detail Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Arch

itect

ural

Det

ails

Window and Door Details X X X X

Window and Door Shutter Details X X X

Door and Window Schedule X X X X X X X

Typical Roofing Details X

Roof Deck Detail X

Steel Gate Detail X

Detail of Flushing X

Roof Lapping Detail X

Roof Gutter Detail X X

Siphonic Drain Detail X

Canopy Details X X

Elevator Shaft Detail X

Stair Details X X X X

Ramp Details X X

Plant Box Detail X

Signage Detail X X X

Schedule of floor and wall finishes X X X X

Paving Detail X

Shadow Cornice Detail X

Water Tank Mounting Detail X

Typical CR mounting heights X X X

Typical CR wall tile section X X X

Typical Toilet Threshold Detail X

Page 214: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 198 REV 1.0

Table 15 Catalogue of Structural Plans, Sections and Elevations contained in Appendix H

Drawing Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fish

Mar

ket L

andi

ng

Stru

ctur

al P

lans

and

Ele

vatio

ns

Foundation Plan X X X X X X

Slab-on-grade Layout

X X X

Column Layout X

Beam Layout X X

Roof Framing Plan X X X

Framing Plan per floor

X X X

Frame Elevations X X X

Typical Parapet and Gutter Beam Layout

X X

Page 215: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 199 REV 1.0

Table 16 Catalogue of Structural Details contained in Appendix H

Detail Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Stru

ctur

al D

etai

ls

Typical Roofing Details X X

Gutter Detail X X X

Roof Slab Waterproofing Detail

Roof RC beam Detail X X

Typical RC Corner Slab Detail X X X X

Typical RC Beam or Slab Soffit Change Detail X X X

Typical Opening Reinforcement Detail X X X X

Typical RC Canopy Details X X X

Balcony Structural Detail X X X

Typical Ledge Detail X

Typical Detail for Sleeves through Concrete Beam

X X X X

Typical RC Column Rebar Elevation X X

Typical Detail of Column Lap Splice and Girder to Column Connection

X X

Typical RC Slab and Beam Joint Detail X X

Typical Connection Detail of RC wall at corners

X X

Typical Slab-on-grade Details X X X X

Table of Lap Splice and Anchorage Length X X

Typical RC Footing Reinforcement Details X X X X X X

Typical RC Beam Reinforcement Details X X X X X X

Typical RC Slab Reinforcement Detail X

Page 216: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 200 REV 1.0

Table 14 Catalogue of Structural Details contained in Appendix H Continued

Detail Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Stru

ctur

al D

etai

ls

Beam and Column Schedule X X X X X X

Slab Schedule X

Foundation Schedule X

Shear Wall Reinforcement Detail X

Typical Stair Reinforcement Detail X

Typical Cantilever RC slab Reinforcement Detail

X

Typical RC Beam/Slab Connection Detail X

Strut and Rafter Details X

Rafter to Column Connection Detail X X

C-purlin to Rafter Connection Detail X

Base Plate Detail X X

Typical I beam Splice Detail X

Bolted Splice Detail X

Typical Purlin Connection Detail X

Typical Full Penetration Groove Weld Detail X

Wall Protection Detail X

Boat Dock Detail X

Typical Capping Beam Groove Weld Detail X

Control Joint Detail X

Construction Joint Detail X

Page 217: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 201 REV 1.0

Table 14 Catalogue of Structural Details contained in Appendix H Continued

Detail Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Stru

ctur

al D

etai

ls

Typical Concrete Gutter Detail X

Ramp Slab Section and Detail X X

Bleacher Stair and Slab Detail X

Slab-on-grade Expansion Joint Detail X

Typical Detail of RC Lintel Beam at CHB wall opening

X X

Typical CHB Wall Footing Details X X X

Typical CHB wall connection to Slab Details

X X X

Typical Connection Detail of Masonry Wall

X X X

Typical Section of Masonry Partition Reinforcements

X X

Typical Detail of Pipes embedded in CHB

X

Typical Detail of CR waterproofing X

Page 218: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 202 REV 1.0

Table 17 Catalogue of Electrical Plans contained in Appendix H

Drawing Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Elec

tric

al Lighting Layout Floor

Plan X X X X X X X

Power and Auxillary Floor Plan

X X X X X X X

Table 18 Catalogue of Electrical Details contained in Appendix H

Detail Type vs Project Pu

blic

Mar

ket

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Elec

tric

al D

etai

ls

Schedule of Loads

X X X X

Wiring Schedule X

Single Line Diagram X X X

Riser Diagram X X X

Panel Board Diagram X X X

Ground Test Pit Detail X X X X

Panel Board Details X X X

Panel Board Riser Support Details X X X X

Service Pedestal Detail X X X

Lighting Fixture Schedule X

Lighting Fixture Details X

Typical Conduit Installation Details X

Detector Installation Details X

Detail of Hanging Light X

Page 219: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 203 REV 1.0

Table 19 Catalogue of Plumbing and Sanitary Plans in Appendix H

Drawing Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Plum

bing

and

San

itary

Downspout Layout Roof Plan

X X X X

Storm Drain Layout Plan

X

Sanitary Line Layout Floor Plan

X X X

Waterline Layout Ground Floor Plan

X X

Sanitary Line Layout Isometric

X X X X X X

Waterline layout Isometric

X X X X X X

Isometric Storm Drain Layout

X X X

Plumbing layout per floor

X X X X X

Page 220: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 204 REV 1.0

Table 20 Catalogue of Plumbing and Sanitary BBB Details in Appendix H

Detail Type vs Project

Publ

ic M

arke

t

Mun

icip

al T

own

Hall

Inte

grat

ed B

us

Term

inal

Ci

vic

Cent

er

Bara

ngay

Hal

l

Bara

ngay

Hal

l with

M

ezza

nine

Fi

sh M

arke

t Lan

ding

Plum

bing

and

San

itary

Det

ails

Catch Basin/Area Drain Detail X X X X X X X

Floor Drain Detail X X X X X X X

Clean Out Detail X X X X X

Fire Reserve Collector Detail X

Septic Tank Detail X X X X X X X

Vent Through Roof Detail X X

Vent Through Wall Detail X X

Detail of Air Chamber X X

Water Meter Detail X X X X

Detail of Ceiling Hanger X

Detail of Cistern Tank X X

Detail of Vertical Pipe Hanger X X X

Hose BIBB detail X

Plumbing Fixture Connection Size Schedule X

Pipe Sleeve Detail X

Sanitary Riser Diagram X X

Water Riser Diagram X X

Rainwater Collector Riser Diagram X X

Detail of Trench Drain X

Page 221: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 205 REV 1.0

Common problems with drawings

Incomplete drawings resulting in unclear scope. For e.g. connection details are missing results in non-BBB solutions being constructed or an as-built drawing being used as an existing plan when there has been damage from a calamity i.e. the as-built is therefore no longer the existing condition.

Untracked i.e. various revisions being used resulting in miscommunication of most up-to-date scope/details

BOQ/Detailed Estimate The Detailed Estimate or Bill of Quantities is the list of items you need to build what’s on the drawings.

This example contained in Appendix J is by administration, and provides good and clear descriptions of each item, uses appropriate units and breaksdown labor costs clearly. The 1st page is shown below in Figure 99 First page of example BoQ contained in Appendix JFigure 99.

Common Problems with BOQs

Incorrect qty’s, due to errors in site dimensions. Leads to revision of POW required as approved amount is in excess of what is constructed and therefore unutilized funds need to be realigned. Conversely, if the approved amount is less than what is required to construct the scoped works, funding may need to be acquired for the difference.

Difference in what is on BOQ vs what is shown on the drawings Can result in design intention not constructed if discrepancy not clarified by constructor e.g. smaller size steel angles pieces, smaller size purlins.

Difference in what is on BOQ to what was procured Results in design intention not constructed e.g. smaller size steel angles pieces, smaller size purlins.

Vague and inappropriate units Allows room for interpretation which can result in each of the above issues.

Page 222: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 206 REV 1.0

Figure 99 First page of example BoQ contained in Appendix J Source: General Macarthur LGU, Eastern Samar, 2015

Page 223: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 207 REV 1.0

Schedule A Schedule shows the order of the items of work (listed on the POW), vs the calendar days of the project, and often have an S-curve, which shows the progression of the percentage complete across the project.

Schedules go through a series of revisions throughout a project. In this section, we are developing the 1St version of the schedule to lock in the number of calendar days for the project (and if procurement is by contract, for the contract). This then becomes the basis for extension of time applications and enforcement of liquidated damages.

This 1st version should then be expanded on either by the contractor to form a construction Schedule if the project is by administration, or by the Municipal Engineer during the procurement phase if the project is by administration.

When putting together the schedule for the project, it’s important to consider procurement lead times in the number of calendar days, particularly for any pre-fabricated items, or items being delivered from other islands in the Philippines that are subject to potential transport delays.

Figure 100 Key elements of a Schedule Source: Leyte LGU, Leyte, 2015

Page 224: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 208 REV 1.0

Example Schedules

Figure 101 Example Schedule Source: Burauen LGU, Leyte, 2015

Figure 102 Example Schedule Source: General Macarthur LGU, Eastern Samar, 2015

Page 225: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 209 REV 1.0

Common Problems with Schedules

They aren’t updated when changes in the scope of works occur and consequently, the percentage complete predictions are invalid.

They aren’t expanded on past this 1st attempt at a schedule.

Procurement isn’t included and as such, the contractor starts procuring when he receives the notice to proceed and as such, there is a delay before construction can commence.

Use the schedule to help you Plan your works, and during procurement and construction, track your progress. Use the Schedule to ask questions (of your contractor), or to realize you need to develop a catch-up plan/apply for an extension of time.

Page 226: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 210 REV 1.0

Technical Specifications The Technical Specification sets out the standard and specific requirements of the infrastructure items on the POW. It combines with the construction notes on the drawings to convey the designers intent for the details and quality of the works.

Depending on the size of a project, you may wish to put the information that would be contained in the technical specifications in the notes section of your drawings. This is ok, provided that you convey the same information that would be contained in the specification.

A specification needs a section on each of the elements in your POW, and needs to include inspection and testing requirements specific to the project. It is particularly important that these inspection and testing requirements are included as part of the specification, as they then form part of the contract documents (if the procurement is by contract), which gives you power to enforce them during the construction phase of the project.

Refer Appendix K for two example project specific specifications, and also for some generic specifications on concrete, steel and miscellaneous metal that could be edited for your project.

Minimum Testing Requirements Refer to Appendix K for an example list of minimum testing requirements placed in contract documents, and also for the DPWH Schedule of Minimum Test Requirements Covering Items of Work of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highway, Bridges and Airports, 1998, (Volume II).

Required Project Inspection List

The specification should include the inspection requirements for the project in an Appendix or Annex to it. Table 21 below shows a list of inspections and a yes/no box that would be completed for the sub-project before the table was included in the Specification.

Table 21 Example of an Inspection List

List of Inspections Required for this

project Y/N Site Stakeout Site Excavation and Clearing Materials i.e. sand, cement, aggregate, steel sections, reinforcing bars, CHB Reinforcing fabrication Truss Fabrication Formwork Pre-concrete pour for footings, columns, slabs Masonry Truss Installation Roofing Installation Installation openings and surfaces i.e. windows, doors, tiling etc. Finishing i.e. plastering, painting, sealing

Page 227: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 211 REV 1.0

Common problems with Specifications

Specifications not being attached to contract documents

Specifications not being used during construction

Specifications not including inspection and testing requirements, which consequently can’t be enforced.

What examples from your LGU can you add to this section to help learn from?

What went well?

What could be improved?

How could this improvement be achieved?

Page 228: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 212 REV 1.0

Finalization of Documentation Introduction to this section Why do I need internal (LGU) and external (DILG) verification of my design and documentation?

We all miss things. We all make mistakes sometimes. Verification is the process of catching these missed items/these mistakes, before they become locked in budgets and contracts.

How much time and how much detail do I go into in the verification?

This is an exercise in risk. Think about the probable failure mechanisms, look at the documentation to see that those have been covered and/or make additions/changes as required. For example, if the roof blew out because the connections to the concrete columns failed, pay special attention to the connection design and documentation, taking care not to ignore other possible element failures though.

What does it involve?

Reviewing the detailed design and documentation and checking it will allow, and ensure (and much as documents can) for construction of a BBB project.

What tools are available?

The forms in the following sections.

Page 229: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 213 REV 1.0

Internal LGU Verification Form Use the form below to check your Design and Documentation is BBB before you submit to DILG for approval/funding.

DocumentSubmittedY/N Check Y/N Comments

Are the contractor’s profit, OCM etc. in line with DO. 22 requirements?If by admin, is there no allowance for Contractor's profit or Indirect costs?

BOQ/Detailed Estimate

Are the units appropriate for the items i.e. kg for steel, lot for doors and windows with clear descriptor (such that it won’t be a problem during punchlisting)?

Are there enough drawings for the scope listed in the POW, and is there enough detail for the constructor to build from them? Check there is at least one drawing for each item on the POW.Is it clear what is existing and to remain, what is existing and to be repaired, what is to be demolished and what is to be newly constructed?Is it clear what the connection details between all elements should be?

Is there a corresponding timeframe for each item on the POW?Are the Calender days the same as those on the POW?Is there a section for each item on the POW?Are the Inspection and Testing requirements included?

LGU Internal BBB Verification FormModule 3 Form 1

The purpose of this form is for the LGU to self-check their proposed project against the BBB Manual, before signing the documents and submitting them for funding.

It’s trying to connect the Post event, Project Scoping and Design and Documentation together, to do a final check before the documents are submitted for approval to ensure that BBB has been included in the application for funding for the

project.

2. Project History

3. Checking the documents required are being submitted, and checking for common problems.

1. Project Data

Copy on hand during this review Y/NDocument Name, Presence Y/N

CLUP (Year Updated) (Period Created) (Status)

POW

Local Infrastructure Audit FormPDNA Detailed Damage InspectionDamage AnalysisDesign Criteria Form, Concept Drawings and Concept Design Decision Form

Drawings

Schedule

Technical Specification

RegionProvinceCity/MunicipalityBarangayBuilding Name

Page 230: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 214 REV 1.0

Y/N Comments

BBB Objective Y/N Comments

Maintaining for Resilience

Quality Construction for Resilience

Yes, no comments

CheckHave there been changes in the initial items of work vs what’s on the POW?

4. Check Module 3 outputs with Module 2 outputs.

Check

Designing for Resilience

StructureDo the documents consider the BBB discussion in the 'Detailed Design' Section of this Manual, and have they been documented so they can be constructed to a BBB standard?FunctionalityDo the documents provide for all legislated requirements to be included in the project?

Step 5. Check Module 3 outputs for inclusion and ability to enforce BBB

Are the elements that aren't included being applied for funding from other sources?

By now you should have an understanding of the history of the project, and can undertake a more thorough review of materials and details being proposed.

If so, is there documentation explaining the change i.e. funding constraints, DED development, additional information about the site obtained etc.?If there were changes, which parts of the design criteria and concept documents were affected? Structure? Land Use ? Functionality?

Step 6. Ready for submission?

Yes, with comments for internal LGU action concurrent with funding approvalNo, actions required pre-

submission

Has the maintenance plan for the project been considered in the design and documentation development? Which features of the documents show this?

Have Inspection and Testing Requirements been included?

Of these affected, is the solution being proposed achieving some elements of BBB across each of these areas?

Page 231: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 215 REV 1.0

Existing DILG Verification Form The DILG reviewer should use the Internal LGU Verification Form for reference when filling in the form below, and make comments regarding it in the ‘General Comments’ section.

I. PROVINCE REGION:II. CITY MUNICIPALITYIII. PROJECT COST:IV. INDORSEMENT LETTER FROM LOCAL CHIEF EXECUTIVE YES NOV. NAME OF PROJECTVI. EQUAL

BELOW: DIFFERENCE: PhP____________________EXCEEDED: LGU COUNTERPART: PhP______________________

VII. MODE OF IMPLEMENTATION

A. SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

DIRECT COST With WithOut

01. Unit Cost Analysis02. Back - Up Computations Quantity Calculations Computation of Number of Days/Bar Chart/Schedule03. Detailed Drawing04. Photos/Pictures of Damage Portion

IF BY CONTRACT:

INDIRECT COST

01. OCM (Overhead-5-8%, Contigencies 0.5-3% Miscellaneous Expenses 0.5-1%)02. Contractor's Profit (10% of EDC)03. Taxes [12% of (EDC+OCM+Profit)]

IF BY ADMINISTRATION:

01. Overhead (5%)

02. Contingencies (0.5%)

03. Miscellaneous (0.5%)

B. COMMENTS on Rates and Rentals

01. Material Costing

02. Labor Rates

03. Equipment Rentals

APPROVED: DISAPPROVED:

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR AND LOCAL GOVERNMENTREHABILITATION ASSISTANCE FOR YOLANDA (RAY) - AFFECTED AREAS

AMOUNT OF PROJECT COST AGAINST ALLOCATION

Remarks / Comments

REMARKS/COMMENTS

PhP

CHECKLIST OF REQUIREMENTS FOR TECHNICAL EVALUATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROGRAM OF WORKS (IPW)

By ContractBy Administration

PhP

Proof of LGU track record of completed similar project with cost of at least 50% of the cost of propose project

REMARKS/COMMENTS

REMARKS/COMMENTS

Checked and Evaluated By:

GENERAL COMMENTS:

RECOMMENDATIONS/SUGGESTIONS:

Page 232: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 216 REV 1.0

MODULE 4: BBB CONSTRUCTION AND QUALITY

PROJECT STAGE: IMPLEMENTATION

This section of the BBB Operations Manual covers:

■ BBB Pre-Construction

BBB Quality in Construction

Project Control Documents

Project Monitoring

■ BBB Quality Inspection

BBB Inspection and Checklists

■ BBB Construction Materials and Methods

Materials and work methods

Page 233: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 217 REV 1.0

Page 234: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 218 REV 1.0

BBB Pre-Construction Introduction The BBB features of your project have been conceptualized, options assessed and designed in Modules 2 and 3; this is now where we implement the fully documented project.

Module 4 takes the project documentation including the Specifications, For Construction Drawings, POW, BOQ/Detailed Estimate and Schedule and develops the construction program, applies management techniques and conducts Site Inspections to guide the project during the implementation stage. To implement BBB infrastructure, the quality of construction materials and workmanship is the focus during implementation.

Quality, and quality construction through supervision, good workmanship and monitoring materials and work methods is where we can practically apply the BBB principles.

For the building structural elements, the following BBB components will be covered in Module 4:

Pre-Construction Preparation

Quality Inspection and Testing

Construction Materials and Methodology

Not covered:

Process for procurement of contractor/ materials

Workforce planning for administration

Inspections of electrical, fire code, plumbing, sanitation and building. These items are covered in existing Philippines National Codes (referenced in Module 3).

Page 235: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 219 REV 1.0

BBB Quality in Construction Quality Triangle The elements of the quality triangle, as introduced earlier in the manual, can assist how we think about the project and delivery strategies.

The elements of Time, Cost and Scope all influence the Quality of the project and achieving the BBB objective during the critical project implementation stage. Refer to Figure 103.

With the Quality triangle, if the project scope is increased it will impact the other sides of the triangle – the project cost and/or schedule.

Likewise, if the project schedule is changed (for example, if the project must be delivered quicker) the cost and/or scope will be impacted. This concept is therefore a useful way for Project Managers and team members to think about the impact of changes and impact on the implementation of the project.

What can we do to manage the Scope, Time and Cost quality elements? Using the documents prepared during the earlier Modules, together with tools in Module 4, we can apply quality control mechanisms to manage the Scope, Time and Cost. Refer to Table 22

What is Quality?

Is a judgment by the user of the product, finish or service

the standard of a product or service, as compared to a similar product; the degree of excellence

Quality is described in general terms such as stable, durable, aesthetics and functionality

Quality

Figure 103 Quality Triangle

Page 236: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 220 REV 1.0

Table 22 Scope, Time and Cost Control Mechanisms

Quality Elements Quality Control mechanisms

Scope

Detail engineering drawings POW and BoQ/Detailed Estimate Site supervision Inspection program at key construction points Monitoring, Communication and documentation of progress

Time

Detail Construction Schedule and S-curve tracking Procurement plan for materials and equipment Management of risks

Cost

Site management of materials Tracking the Construction Schedule, including procurement of materials Management of risks

What is Quality Control?

We have identified a number of ways to control aspects of the project, but what is control?

It is usually in relation to something in need of checking or regulating, such as adherence to standards

It is used to identify a problem early in the construction before the same issue is repeated

BBB Quality Control in Construction The implementation of BBB Quality Control during the construction is two-fold, it is to check:

Materials Quality

Method of construction

Quality Control is checking for conformance to requirements during the course of construction as a preventative tool, not as corrective measure. Quality Control can also assist in control of scope and cost changes.

Quality Control includes materials and method inspections to ensure that the correct materials are used, and the method conforms to the approved plans and specifications. To achieve quality in construction, it requires the owner of the structure and the contractor to commit to the defined specifications and method of works as developed through the design.

The BBB Quality Control process outlined in Module 4 provides the best opportunity to achieve:

Highest quality of work and resilient structures are implemented

Achieving the design life of the structure

Poor methodology is not repeated throughout the project

Quality materials are used, and sub-standard materials are rejected

Table 23 provides a summary of the BBB Quality Control mechanisms developed in Module 3 and how it can guide your resilient infrastructure implementation in Module 4.

Page 237: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 221 REV 1.0

Table 23 Quality Control Mechanisms

BBB Module Quality Control mechanism

How does it help?

Module 3 Specifications, Drawings, BoQ/Detailed Estimate

Be clear about what you want

Contractor understands the project

Inspection and Testing program outlined

Module 4 Inspection and Testing

Avoid the use of unacceptable substitutes

Know the characteristics of the materials

Avoid errors that might result in unnecessary maintenance costs or rectification later

To minimize extra work

Evaluate the materials and workmanship at the time of installation

Assures the structural capacity of the building is as per the design specification

Scheduling Strategies Taking the schedule developed in Module 3, the construction implementation strategy is further developed by the Municipal Engineer if by Administration; or by the Contractor if by Contract.

Spending time to develop the detail construction schedule (or to review the detail developed by the Contractor if by Contract) can:

Identify conflicts between competing resource

Streamline implementation

Gain efficiency in mobilization and logistics

Sub-Project Construction Schedule Depending on if the sub-project is being delivered by Contract or by Administration will determine who will update the schedule, being the detail plan for the implementation of the Contract including the following:

Construction Activity

Workforce requirements (skills and numbers)

Materials (lead times and fabrication)

Plant and equipment requirements

Development of the construction schedule enables the time aspect of the project to be detailed. From Module 3, the items identified in the POW have been itemized and translated to the Schedule, next is to detail the Construction schedule to the activity level to better plan resources, equipment and timing of the inspection and testing program.

Page 238: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 222 REV 1.0

If the implementation is by Contract, the contractor prepares this to detail what is required to happen when and what is needed. For the Engineer (inspector), it enables a thorough review of the contractors timing and planning arrangements to facilitate a smooth implementation.

1. Breakdown the construction of the sub-project into the main elements

2. Subdivide deliverables into components level, using the BoQ/Detail Estimate and Schedule in Module 3

3. Breakdown the components into activities – the basis for the construction program

For example as shown in Figure 104 Sub-project schedule example, the Municipal Hall construction is broken down to the main elements. These can then be further broken down to the components of the project.

The activity level details the required materials, ordering resources to better understand what makes up the entire project. Breaking the project down to activities assists to identify key tasks and risks during the implementation.

Page 239: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 223 REV 1.0

Figure 104 Sub-project schedule example

Once broken down to the activity level, the tasks can be identified as a time scale, and representative of the order of the project.

4. Using the sub-project POW developed, identify the activities on a Gantt chart, together with the time required for each of the activities

5. Identify what activities can occur early, or require a long lead time, such as specialized materials orders, fabrication and concrete curing times.

6. Link the activities that are required to occur consecutively. This will give you the duration of the project, the scheduled start and finish date for each specific activity and the critical path of the project. Delays to activities on the critical path will delay the completion of the full project. These are the key activities to monitor for project slippage.

7. Identify the requirements for equipment and resources at each of these activities

8. Identify the materials testing and inspection points as detailed in the Specifications

Municipal Hall

roofing truss fabrication order materials: steel sections, fixings

fabrication on ground, supervision and inspections installation of trusses,

purlins, sheeting order bolted connections, steel plates

reinforced concrete structure

site preparation & foundations

reinforcement, beams, columns, slab

masonry walls laying of CHB

exterior and interior fixings

installation of windows, doors

plastering, rendering, painting

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT

COMPONENT LEVEL

ACTIVITY LEVEL SUB PROJECT

Page 240: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 224 REV 1.0

Figure 105 Gantt Chart example

Scheduling Across Multiple Sites Is there an easy way to deliver all these projects within a tight timeframe and still deliver a BBB Quality structure?

Now that we have an understanding of each project, we can work through a strategy for the multiple projects across the municipality. We can think about ways to streamline, coordinate and consolidate some of the works across multiple sites.

Groupings and clustering of works depending on the nature can assist in the organizing and coordinating across the municipality.

Page 241: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 225 REV 1.0

From the sub-project schedules, identify the common elements and areas of similarity. Consider a number of groupings to organize and coordinate the works by different classifications, including:

Nature of the works - by rehabilitation, reconstruction and demolition

Geographic areas - by site access, clustering of nearby sites and weather constraint

Priority and resources – by urgency to reinstate services and building function, materials availability and workforce and skills.

See Figure 106 for potential grouping strategies to consider coordinating multiple site constructions.

Figure 106 Grouping Strategies for coordination of Multiple Sites

Risk Management in Construction Through the development of the construction schedule, and multiple sites scheduling we can get an appreciation of the scale of the works across the municipality and activities required at each sub-project. We can use this information to identify issues and using a Risk Management tool, we can conduct a short exercise to better understand the potential issues that may impact the implementation of the project.

What is risk?

Risk is an event or situation that could have an unintended result or outcome

What is risk management?

Risk management considers the impact a risk can have and the likelihood of this occurring.

Risk management is planning and implementing actions to anticipate and control risk

What is a Risk Management Plan?

The Risk Management Plan identifies the risks with high priority and works through a process to reduce the risks and impact on the project implementation.

nature of works

rehabilitation

reconstruction

demolition

geographic area

site access

clustering of nearby sites

weather

priority & resources urgency to reinstate building function

materials availability

workforce and skills

Page 242: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 226 REV 1.0

By understanding the risks to the project - the events, problems or issues that could have an impact on the delivery program or quality outcomes, we can be pro-active in managing the risks and their impact.

Using a 4 step process as indicated in Figure 107, the development of a Risk Management Plan can assist in clarifying the issues, level the understanding within the team of problems that may occur with the project and prepare a plan to mitigate.

Preparation of a Risk Management Plan can also assist in communication with management and Field Officers on anticipated issues and required actions to be taken. With the right planning and risk management preparation, it might just assist in getting the right support for the project before problems escalate.

Figure 107 Risk Management Plan step process

1. Identify the Risk or Issue that may have an impact during the project implementation

2. Using the Risk Matrix in Figure 108, Assess the potential Impact and Likelihood of the issue occurring.

3. Identify the Actions that you are already taking. Ask – “What more could we do to reduce the risk?” Identify actions to be complete by who and when.

4. Using the Risk Matrix again, Review the Impact and Likelihood

Figure 108 Risk Management Matrix

Work with your team to identify issues that could impact on the project implementation and work through strategies to actively respond, using the Risk Management Template in Appendix L.

Page 243: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 227 REV 1.0

Project Control Documents Pre-construction preparation ensures that Project Control documents are available, and the site manager and contractors have a clear understanding of the project deliverables, methodology and testing/ inspection requirements. Establishing the site communication protocols early can shape the way the project can run. It maybe additional work now to establish meetings and check for documentation, however, it will better prepare the site managers to be able to actively resolve issues that arise.

Who do we need to talk to at this stage?

This is a great opportunity to engage with your Field Officers and key contact people, and to ensure that monitoring requirements and tools are available and understood. Seek the support from your Focal Person if you feel that these skills could be strengthened.

Why is it important to have documentation?

The contractor and project site supervisor are informed of all critical project elements and communication is clear including when and who to inform of problems, changes and at project inspection points.

The project documentation has been prepared during the development of the Module 3, and contracting process. It is the opportunity to recheck the validity of assumptions, and consider changes with funding or other constraints before construction commences.

Refer to Figure 109 for a documentation check if by Administration or Contract.

Detail drawings & specifications POW & BoQ Site requirements Construction Schedule Communication plan (site meetings) Materials procurement plan Workforce plan Site safety plan Site management plan (weather events,

drainage, rubbish)

Detail drawings & specifications POW & BoQ Site requirements Construction Schedule Communication plan (site

meetings) Check the contractor has the following:

Materials procurement plan Workforce plan Site safety plan Site management plan (weather

events, drainage, rubbish)

Figure 109 Documentation Checklist for implementation by Administration or by Contract

BY CONTRACT OR ADMINISTRATION?

ADMINISTRATION CONTRACT

Page 244: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 228 REV 1.0

During the Pre-Construction stage, furnish the site with Project Control forms and outline their requirements for use. Refer to Table 24

Table 24 Pre-Construction Forms Reference Table

PROJECT STAGE

FORM NAME & REVISION

NAME WHEN TO USE THE FORM WHO USES THE FORM

PRE-

CON

STRU

CTIO

N

PCM-1 Pre-construction Meeting Agenda

At the pre-construction meeting and to record actions and follow up items

Site Inspector/ Supervisor

DAR-1 Daily Activity Record

Every day Site Foreman/ Contractor

RVO-1 Request for Variation Order

To seek approval for project variations from the approved POW

Municipal Engineer to submit to DILG for Approval

SIF-1 Site Instruction Form

For clarification of discrepancies between drawings and specifications or for rectification after variation

Municipal Engineer to Issue to the contractor

SIC-1 Safety Inspection Checklist

At the commencement of the project and for spot checks during the works

Municipal Engineer, or by DILG Field Officers

CAR-1 Construction Accident Report Form

To be used if there was an accident on the site. Can also be used to record a near miss.

Contractor and Inspector

Page 245: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 229 REV 1.0

Table 25 Pre-Construction Meeting Agenda Form

PRE CONSTRUCTION MEEETING AGENDA

FORM No.

PCM

REV. No. 1

PROJECT:

PROVINCE:

PROJECT DESCRIPTION: BARANGAY:

Attendees:

Location of meeting: Date:

DOCUMENTATION CHECK: Construction Schedule POW BoQ

Specifications Full Set of Drawings

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ACTION REQUIRED Construction Schedule

a. Detail of activities

Workforce planning a. Demonstration of skills

Site occupancy a. Contractor access to the site b. Limitations to access (roads,

equipment)

Equipment a. Confirm availability

Materials procurement plan a. Materials Delivery plan b. Approved Suppliers

Project Control documents and meetings a. Meeting schedule b. Documents & forms c. Reporting schedule

Confirmation of Inspection and testing program

a. Availability of testing equipment b. Inspection notification process

Occupational safety and health a. Provision of suitable health and

safety plan

Site management a. Plan for storage of materials,

delivery, fabrication etc

ACTION (BY WHO & WHEN): attach additional pages as required

Page 246: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 230 REV 1.0

Table 26 Daily Activity Record Form

DAILY ACTIVITY RECORD

FORM No.

DAR

REV. No. 1

DATE: WEATHER: Fair Cloudy Rainy Stormy

PROJECT:

BARANGAY:

MANPOWER

EQUIPMENT

ACTIVITIES TO BE DONE: PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED/REMARKS MATERIALS DELIVERY QTY ITEM

TESTING & INSPECTIONS CONDUCTED: MATERIAL TEST OR INSPECTION CONDUCTED

INCIDENTS OR ACCIDENTS (SUMMARY) - COMPLETE FULL FORM: PREPARED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature:

Page 247: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 231 REV 1.0

Table 27 Request for Variation Order Form

REQUEST FOR VARIATION ORDER

FORM No. RVO

REV. No. 1

PROJECT:

BARANGAY:

WORK ITEM:

SUBJECT:

DESCRIPTION OF PROPOSED CHANGE REASON FOR CHANGE REFERENCE DRAWINGS /SPECIFICATIONS ATTACHMENTS

REQUESTED BY: Contractor/ Site Supervisor

REQUESTED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

Signature

RECOMENDING APPROVAL: Mayor

Signature

DILG REFIONAL OFFICE RECOMMENDED BY: PDMU

APPROVAL BY: REGIONAL DIRECTOR

DATE Notes on the use of this form:

Identify budget implications and co-investment amount Variations must not reduce the quality of materials or structural components Refer to the Funding Guidelines and MOA for project inclusions and exclusions

Page 248: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 232 REV 1.0

Table 28 Site Instruction Form

SITE INSTRUCTION

FORM No. SIF

REV. No. 1

PROJECT:

BARANGAY:

WORK ITEM:

SUBJECT:

INSTRUCTION ATTACHMENTS

DRAWING NO.’S UPDATED

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 249: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 233 REV 1.0

Occupational Safety and Health The safety of the site and workers is essential to the project being delivered to quality and time requirements.

In each sub-project POW, there should be an allowance for worker safety gear, ensure that it is used.

The Department of Labor and Employment has legislated requirements for Occupational Safety and Health on the worksite. There are penalties that can be enforced for non-compliance, and the safety of your workers is at risk.

The DOLE Department Order 13 requires that Construction Safety Training is mandatory for all Safety Officers in the construction industry.

Reference material on approved safety gear is available on the Department of Labor and Employment website: http://www.oshc.dole.gov.ph

Figure 110 DOLE Website www.oshc.dole.gov.ph

The Department Order 13 requires that:

A suitable Construction Health and Safety Program is developed and implemented on site

Each construction site is required to have a minimum number of Site Safety personnel

Provision of Emergency Health and Safety Personnel and Facilities for the number of workers on site

Construction Safety Signs are displayed at appropriate locations and for the risk

Accreditation and operation of Heavy Equipment on site

Information provided to workers on the Health and Safety of the worksite

Cost of implementing Safety and Health is from the project budget

Page 250: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 234 REV 1.0

The Legislation and Department Order 13 requires that the site supervisor is responsible for the following:

Use of personal safety gear

well maintained equipment

worker training and supervision

electrical safety

working from heights with the use of harnesses

site cleanliness

Figure 111 Occupational Safety and Health Personal Gear

Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 251: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 235 REV 1.0

Table 29 Safety Inspection Checklist Form

SAFETY INSPECTION CHECKLIST FORM No. SIC

REV. No.1

Region:___________Province:__________________City/Municipality__________________________

Name of Project:_______________________________________________________________________

Type of Structure:__________________________No. of Floors:_______Total Floor Area__________

Mode of Construction:_____By Administration_______By Contract

Name of Contractor:_________________________________________________________________

Date Checked By:

(Inspector)

NO ITEM STATUS NO ITEM STATUS

1 ACCIDENT PREVENTION & ORGANIZE c. Eye Protection a. Trained First Aid Person d. Safety Lines and Belts b. First Aid Kit e. suitable footwear c. Safety Material Posted 5 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION d. Emergency Phone #'s a. Adequate well insulated wiring 2 HOUSE KEEPING AND SANITATION b. Fuses and GFI provided a. Good housekeeping and tidiness c. Fire hazards checked b. Waste containers provided and used d. Electrical danger posted c. Oil and grease removed 6 HAND AND POWER TOOLS d. Regular disposal of waste and trash,

construction debris a. Tools and cords in good

condition

e. Sanitary facilities adequate and clean b. Proper grounding f. Adequate supply of water c.All mechanical safeguards in use

g. Passageways and walkways cleared d.Tools stored when not in use h. Adequate lighting e. Right tool being used for the

job at hand

3 FIRE PREVENTION f. Wiring properly installed a. Fire extinguishers identified, checked 7 POWER ACTUATED TOOLS b. Hydrants clear access to public

thoroughfare open a.Local laws and ordinances

complied with

d. NO SMOKING posted and enforced where needed

b.All operators qualify

4 PERSONNAL PROTECTION c. Tools checked and in good working order

a. Hard-hats b. Noise Level Exposures LEGEND: A Accomplished/Acceptable/Adequate UA Unacceptable/Unaccomplished MIS Missing/Please Provide AD - Add Sufficient Number Required NA - Not Applicable NO - Not Operating/Working

Page 252: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 236 REV 1.0

NO ITEM STATUS NO ITEM STATUS

e. Tools only used on recommended materials

10 HEAVY EQUIPMENT

f. Safety goggles or face shields a. Lubrication & repair of moving parts

g. Flying hazards checked by use backing up, removal of pernel or of captive stud tool

b. Lights, brakes, warnings signals operative

8 LADDERS c. Wheels checked when necessary

a. Stock ladders in good condition d. Access roads well maintained and laid out properly

b. Stock ladders not spliced 11 MOTOR VEHICLES c. Properly secured, top & bottom A. Breaks, lights, warning

devices operative

d. Siderails on fixed ladders extend above top landing

b. Weight limits and load sizes controlled

e. Built-up ladders constructed of sound materials

c. Personnel carried in safe manner

f. Rungs not over 12" on center 12 BARRICADES g. Stepladders fully open when in use a. Floor openings planked over

or barricade

h. Metal ladders not used around electrical hazards

b. Roadways & sidewalks effectively protected

i. Proper maintenance & storage c. Adequate lighting provided 9 SCAFFOLDING d. Traffic controlled a. All structural members adequate for

use e. Warning signboards in place

b. Stock ladders not spliced 13

HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

c. Safe tie-in to structure d. Ladders and working areas free of

debris, water, grease a. Neat storage area, clear

passageway

e. Proper footings provided b. Stacks on firm footings, not too high

f. Passersby protected from falling objects

c. Men picking up loads correctly

g. Supports plumb, adequate d. Materials protected from heat and moisture

h. Guard rails & toeboards in place e. Protection against falling into hoppers and bins

i. Scaffold machines in working order f. Duct protection observed and moisture

j. Ropes and cables in good condition g. Protection against falling into hoppers and bins

LEGEND: A Accomplished/Acceptable/Adequate UA Unacceptable/Unaccomplished MIS Missing/Please Provide AD Add Sufficient Number Required NA Not Applicable NO Not Operating/Working

Page 253: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 237 REV 1.0

NO ITEM STATUS NO ITEM STATUS 14 EXCAVATION AND SHORING 17 MASONRY a. Shoring of adjacent structures a. Proper scaffolding

b. Shoring as needed for soil and depth b. Masonry saws properly equipped, dust protection provided

c. Public roads and sidewalks supported and protected

c. Safe hoisting equipment

d. Materials not too close to the edge of excavation

18 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE

e. Lighting at night a. Adequate warnings signs, markers and lights

f. Water controlled b. Equipment not blocking right-of-way

g. Equipment at safe distance from edge c. Traffic control through construction site

h. Ladders and stairs provided d. Adequate number of traffic control officers at site

i. Equipment ramps adequate slope not too steep

e. Adequate marking and maintenance of detours

j. Dewatering pumps on standby f. Dust control

k. Scaffold or guard rails in place g. Adequate lighting 15 DEMOLITION 19 FLAMMABLE GASES &

LIQUIDS

a. Operations planned ahead a. All containers clearly identified

b. shoring adjacent structures b. Proper storage practices observed

c. Materials chutes c. Fire hazards checked d. Sidewalk and other public protection d. Proper storage

temperatures and protection

e. Clearing operating space for trucks and other vehicles

20 WELDING AND CUTTING

16 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION a. Screens and shields a. Forms properly installed and braced b. Goggles, gloves and clothing

e. Protection from cement dust c. Electrical equipment grounded

f. Hard hats, safety shoes and shirt covering skin

d. Power cables protected and in good repair

LEGEND: A Accomplished/Acceptable/Adequate UA Unacceptable/Unaccomplished MIS Missing/Please Provide AD Add Sufficient Number Required NA Not Applicable NO Not Operating/Working

Page 254: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 238 REV 1.0

Safety Officers - comments and recommendation:

Construction Manager - comments and recommendation: Checked by: Checked by: Contractor's Safety Officer Contractor's Project-in-Charge Concurred by: Noted by: Construction Manager Owner

Page 255: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 239 REV 1.0

Page 256: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 240 REV 1.0

Page 257: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 241 REV 1.0

Safety Officers - comments and recommendation:

Construction Manager - comments and recommendation: Checked by: Checked by: Contractor's Safety Officer Contractor's Project-in-

Charge

Concurred by: Noted by: Construction Manager Owner

Page 258: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 242 REV 1.0

Table 30 Construction Accident Report Form

CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENT REPORT FORM

FORM No. CAR

REV. No. 1

CONTRACTOR (Prime or Subcontractor)

NAME OF SUPERINTENDENT OR FOREMAN

DATE OF ACCIDENT

TIME

LOCATION

DESCRIPTION OF ACCIDENT PRIMARY CAUSE

CON

TRAC

TOR'

S PE

RSO

NN

EL O

R EQ

UIP

MEN

T

NAME OF INJURED EMPLOYEE

OCCUPATION

AGE

SEX

NATURE OF INJURY DEGREE OF INJURY First Aid on site Doctor Visit Hospital Admission Fatality

TYPE OF EQUIPMENT EXTENT OF DAMAGE

OTH

ER P

ERSO

NS

OR

PRO

PERT

Y

NAME OF INJURED PARTY

ADDRESS

AGE SEX

NATURE OF INJURIES

NAME OF PROPERTY OWNER

NATURE AND EXTENT OF DAMAGES

WAS USE OR LACK OF EQUIPMENT A FACTOR IN THIS ACCIDENT? YES NO

IF YES, EXPLAIN: WHAT SAFETY REGULATIONS WERE VIOLATED: WHAT CORRECTIVE ACTION HAS BEEN TAKEN BY THE CONTRACTOR:

PREPARED BY:

NOTED: MUNICIPAL ENGINEER

Page 259: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 243 REV 1.0

Project Monitoring Project monitoring and reporting provides a powerful tool for the Municipal Engineer to manage the contractor and expenditure according to the approved POW and Schedule.

The project monitoring tools can also assist the DILG in tracking progress of the projects according to the approved documents

Statement of Work Accomplished The Statement of Work Accomplished (SWA) tracks progress for the component of the works, % completion and progress cost. The elements of the SWA are shown in Figure 112.

Figure 112 Statement of Work Accomplished

Page 260: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 244 REV 1.0

Program of Works Program of Works (POW) is the project summary of costs, by built element, direct and indirect costs, includes the project construction schedule dates & duration.

An example POW is shown in Figure 113.

Figure 113 Program of Works

Construction Schedule and S-Curve S-curves are a useful project management and monitoring tool. They allow the progress of a project to be tracked visually over time, and form a historical record of what has happened to date. An analysis of S-curves allows project progress, slippage, and potential problems to be visually tracked. It requires regular monitoring to maintain a record.

Comparison of the original and progress S-curves can reveal if the project has scope has grown or if there is a slippage in the project timeline.

Figure 114 shows the S curve, highlighted are the components, percentage completion and calendar days.

Page 261: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 245 REV 1.0

Figure 114 Construction Schedule and S-Curve

Working Drawings Using the “For Construction Drawings” and specification developed in Module 3, maintain throughout the project any updates to the drawings, including dimensions, materials and sizing if required to change. Record the location of any buried services and alignment of conduits, piping and services within the structure. Marking on the physical drawings is the best approach, and take them with you to each site meeting.

The marked up drawings can then be used at the Punchlisting stage of the project, telling us exactly what we have built and location of services.

By continuously updating the drawings, this serves as a useful tool to be used after the project is complete and for future works or infrastructure queries.

Questioning Infrastructure Flowchart – Project Verification Before construction commences (and during construction), the information contained in the POW, Schedule and SWA is required to be checked for alignment.

The Infrastructure Questioning Flowchart for verification of the project documentation applies questioning strategies to the three key pieces of project documents to align the information and check for accuracy.

Refer to

Figure 115 (over two pages) for the Questioning Infrastructure Flowchart – project verification to be applied at the commencement of the project and during monitoring reporting.

Page 262: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 246 REV 1.0

Page 263: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 247 REV 1.0

Figure 115 POW-SWA-Schedule Questioning Flow Chart

Page 264: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 248 REV 1.0

BBB Quality Inspection Process During Module 3, we outlined the materials testing and inspection requirements in the Specification, the timely inspection of materials and method are best way that we can achieve BBB during construction.

Inspections and testing of materials and methods conducted enable problems to be identified and rectified before they are repeated multiple times. This can save money, time and resources during the project implementation and reduce maintenance costs over the asset life.

The Quality Inspection Process enables checking of Punchlisted items during construction. During the Quality Inspection Process we are checking that items have been completed in accordance with the documentation drawings and specification.

By completing the Quality Inspections we are making the Punchlisting process easier, and are better able to ensure compliance and standards.

Can’t the contractor just build it? He has done heaps of these projects before! He knows what to do, I don’t need to check it!

Yes you do! Applying Build Back Better Quality Inspections ensures that we are using the materials as specified and implementing to the workmanship required. We want to ensure that the buildings we are rehabilitating and constructing meet the functional requirements and are structurally sound to withstand another calamity.

It is particularly important to check quality where the mode of failure was obvious for this structure – such as materials quality or workmanship.

Would you ask someone to build you a house and not check that it is what you wanted?

Won’t it take longer if we have to wait to get things checked?

It will take longer to remediate any errors on the construction site if we haven’t conducted the checks at the appropriate stages of the construction, and worse, if the contractor has then repeated the same problem multiple times.

Being clear during the development of the project specifications stage in Module 3 ensures that the contractor is aware of the requirements to inspect and test the materials and at the identified construction stages. A clear line of communication (as we worked out during the kick-off meeting) will enable that the correct notification is provided to enable the inspection to occur. Also consider the scheduling with other sites and inspections and if this can be coordinated.

Won’t it cost more money to ask for all these things?

The inspections are specified during the documentation stage, and allowed for in the contractor’s price if delivery is by Contract (refer DO. 22 and 72).

For by Administration, an allowance is required to be allocated for testing materials and time scheduled within the activities to conduct the testing, materials and method inspections.

Page 265: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 249 REV 1.0

BBB Quality Inspection Forms and Checklists The inspection forms and checklists developed in BBB Quality Inspection Process section of this Module serves as a guide through the implementation stage to check the quality of the materials used and the methods applied are consistent with the specifications and standards. The forms, checklists and guides do not cover all construction elements, and it is encouraged to always be engaged with what is happening on the construction site, conduct frequent site inspections and maintain open communication to ensure that you are fully informed of issues with your project.

The BBB Construction Materials and Method section is a guide to the quality issues to be aware of, and to assist in familiarizing yourself of some of the key issues to be aware of before going to site.

The example used for the BBB Quality Inspection process is a reinforced concrete building with a truss roofing system. There may be elements of this project that are not included in your scope of works, use the sections as applicable. Refer to Figure 116 on the next page.

Page 266: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 250 REV 1.0

Table 31 references the BBB Quality Inspection forms and checklists. The inspection forms and checklists are to be utilized during the construction process, and gathered prior to Punchlisting as a BBB validation check.

BBB Quality Inspection Forms and Checklists – Note for use

The checks and guides provided here is not a complete set of inspection and testing requirements, however it provides for key inspection points as observed during RAY Batch 1 implementation projects.

It is intended that new forms are developed by the LGU’s and DILG as required to supplement this initial package.

Page 267: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 251 REV 1.0

Figure 116 Inspection Plan and Flow chart, concrete construction example

Page 268: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 252 REV 1.0

Table 31 Construction Inspection Forms & Checklists Reference Table PROJECT STAGE

FORM NAME & REVISION

NAME WHEN TO USE THE FORM/WHAT TO INSPECT

WHO USES THE FORM *for validation &

monitoring purposes

Site works DGW -1 Demolition and

Ground works Site Stakeout Excavation and Clearing Soil poisoning

Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

Steel Re-bar SRB- 1 Steel Rebar Materials

Inspection and Fabrication

Materials Inspection Fabrication of Steel Rebar

Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

Concrete

CMI -1 Concrete Materials Inspection

Materials Inspection at Delivery for: Cement Course Aggregate Sand/Fine Aggregate Water source

Municipal Engineer

CPR -1 Concrete Pouring Request

To be used at the following Inspection Points to check Formwork, Rebar and Placement Notification at least 3 days before pouring for inspection of: Foundation Tie beams Slab on grade Column Column to beams Suspended slab Column Column to roof beam

Contractor request to Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

CST -1 Concrete Slump Test Used for every batch of concrete before placement

Contractor *Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

CPC-1 Concrete Placement Checklist

For each structural element. At the start of each pour

Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

Masonry CHB-1 Masonry CHB Quality Check

Laying Lintels and Openings

Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

Truss and Roofing

TF-1 Truss Fabrication Steel Materials Inspection Welding Quality Fabrication Inspection

Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

TIRI-1 Truss Installation and Roofing Inspection

Truss and column connection Roof sheeting and fixing

installation

Municipal Engineer *Field Officer

Page 269: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 253 REV 1.0

Site Inspections This section outlines the key responsibilities of the inspectors and actions to take during the course of the project implementation.

It is important on any construction site to develop strong, professional and open lines of communication early with the contractor. Ensure that the project control documents are utilized, and inspections procedures and site checks are clearly understood.

Establish regular meeting schedule

Agree on the inspection time line and notification required for inspection points

Maintain professional relationship at all times

Ensure that you are prepared with documentation prior to all meetings

Deliver on the actions from the site meetings – build trust with the contractor

Be respectful of opinions and assist in the resolution of issues. Issues shared are easier to solve

Conduct spot checks and follow up with information

The Site Inspector’s Role The National Building Code of the Philippines and the National Structural Code of the Philippines both outline the requirements and qualities of the Building Inspector.

The inspector (Municipal Engineer) is required to inspect the work for compliance with the plans at identified stages

The inspector should be familiar with the construction site plans, specifications and drawings before attending site meetings

The inspector is required to respond to any queries related to the works

Inspection activities must be in line with the contractor’s program of works and milestones for inspection as outlined in this BBB manual

The inspector should report to his/her supervisor any situations that may cause a delay or problem arising. Alerting the management early about possible problems can assist in timely resolution if the issue is beyond the control of the inspector

Public safety should be foremost in the mind. Any issues observed by the inspector are required to be alerted to the contractor and noted in the Daily Log

Build respect and base decisions on good governance principles including:

Accountability and responsible use of public funds

Application of best practice for all aspects of the construction

Benefit to the community

Achieving Build Back Better

Page 270: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 254 REV 1.0

All accidents are required to be reported using the appropriate form and process, refer to DOLE website

When the inspector or field officer recognizes unacceptable and poor quality works, this must be immediately reported to enable rectification of the practice before it turns into an expensive and time consuming correction. All instances should be recorded in the Daily Log

The inspector is required to give timely instructions to the contractor on all rectification and formalize site instruction

Field Officers and the BBB Inspection Process What is the role of the Field Officer? How can the Field Officer add value to project, and assist in issues resolution in partnership with the contractor/builder/engineer?

In a similar way to the Inspector, the DILG Field Officer, provincial, regional or central office representative is to ensure that the works are being conducted to specified standards:

Inspecting that the works that have been funded are being delivered

Ensure that the components of the structure are being inspected as per the specification

That the works are being completed to a high standard

That the works incorporate BBB principles, inspection and quality checks

Sharing technical knowledge freely and openly with the Municipalities

Developing your own infrastructure knowledge

Actively assist in the resolution of issues

Responding to requests from the field in a timely manner so as not to unduly delay the progress of works

Reporting on the SWA –questioning infra, basics of SWA – refer to Questioning Flow Chart

Questioning Infrastructure Flowchart – Site Inspection Being prepared for the site inspection is the key to being able to question what is happening and having meaningful discussions with the contractor and site representative.

Before going to site check that you have current versions of:

Set of drawings

BoQ/Detailed Estimate

Schedule

SWA

Ensure that the versions you have are the current ones, with marked up changes if applicable. Follow the questioning infrastructure flow chart shown in Figure 117.

Page 271: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 255 REV 1.0

Figure 117 Questioning Infra Flowchart – Site Inspection

Page 272: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 256 REV 1.0

BBB Construction Materials & Method Site Mobilization Establish designated areas at the site for project activities; consider the requirement to utilize the site for efficiency and safety.

Develop a simple plan (sketch) to show a site mobilization plan. Refer to Figure 118. Include the following items as applicable:

Property boundary and services Footprint of building (new and existing if applicable) Delivery areas Storage areas – steel, aggregate, sand Fabrication areas for trusses and steel re-bar Rubbish and waste temporary storage Stockpiling of excavated material Site drainage areas Workers accommodation/site compound Identify changing work areas and requirements for use of the site during construction Identify trees and plan for their protection during the works

Figure 118 Site Mobilization Plan Source: 3D Construction Modeling, 2013

Page 273: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 257 REV 1.0

Demolition and Groundworks Demolition

Using the Demolition Plan, conduct a pre-demolition assessment of stability of structural elements before demolition commences

Conduct demolition in a manner that protects the remaining elements of the building that will be rehabilitated

Site Stake out The stake-out physically transfers the lines and dimensions shown on the detail engineering drawings to the actual real-world site conditions.

Check boundaries, roads, and drainage easements and building set back Identify the location of any existing services, including any underground Locate the building on the site with stake out pegs (use a surveyor if required) Establish a temporary bench mark/ elevation for reference

Clearing and Grubbing Remove rubble and debris, stockpile and clear the site Removal of trees roots and obstructions

Construction Layout Check the building site stakeout for building squareness by measuring the diagonal corners.

Refer to Figure 119.

Figure 119 Construction Layout Source: 3D Construction Modeling, 2013

Page 274: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 258 REV 1.0

Establish the building excavation with the use of string lines on batter boards (with nails) set back from the line of the foundation and stakeout pegs. Ensure that string lines are level. Refer to Figure 120.

Check that the batter boards are fixed securely and will not be disturbed during the excavation

Figure 120 Building set out Source: 3D Construction Modeling, 2013

Excavation Excavate trenches to the required depth, line and grades Trim the trenches to finish to the required dimensions Materials to be excavated include any rock, earth or other materials encountered during

the works Check that the trench walls do not collapse, that there is no standing water within the

excavation Cut slope for permanent excavations shall not be steeper than 1- ½ horizontal to one

vertical, and slopes for permanent fills shall not be steeper than 2 horizontal to one vertical without supporting information

If the excavation is larger than the design footing, shoring will be required to be installed to the required foundation dimension

Page 275: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 259 REV 1.0

Shoring Observe good practice for stockpiling of excavated materials and surcharge loading

adjacent to excavations Use shoring to provide a stable trench and prevent collapse to the excavated trench. Refer

to Figure 121.

Figure 121 Excavation with Shoring Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 276: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 260 REV 1.0

Soil Poisoning Use of approved soil poisoning products. Refer to DOLE website for the most up to date list

of approved products. Refer to the Occupational Safety and Health section of the website Workers are required to use appropriate personal safety and health gear Apply soil poisoning before the placement of lean concrete or gravel mix where required to

be used for the foundation Apply at slab on grade level after compaction. Refer to Figure 122.

Figure 122 Soil Poisoning Source: JICA, 2014b

Dewatering Ensure that the excavated foundations are free of rain water and/or standing water

Pump out or manually remove any standing water

Foundation and Slab on Grade Works The foundations provide the structural capacity to withstand forces that the building is subjected to, as well as the dead weight of the building itself. They are designed depending on the in-situ soil conditions and the forces on the building – such as earthquakes and wind loads.

Poorly constructed foundations, including not dewatering the trench and poor materials and workmanship can contribute to settlement occurring in the building, which may lead to cracking of the structural elements and failure. Getting the foundations right is an early BBB best practice to ensure that the building is stable and suited for the soil conditions.

Page 277: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 261 REV 1.0

Check the stability of the excavation and if soil requires greater support, apply a lean concrete mix (50mm) or gravel bed (100mm) below the specified footing depth. Refer to Figure 123.

The steel re-bar and concrete inspection checklist is required to be completed for the placement of re-bar and the concrete pouring processes.

Refer to the Forms identified in the Inspection process for concrete pre-pour, testing and placement

Compaction of the soil and poisoning is required to be conducted after backfilling of trench for the foundation. Refer to Figure 124

Compaction required for the slab on grade, refer to Figure 125

Foundations:

Transmit all building load to the ground

To limit uneven settlement of the building leading to cracking

To provide a level floor on which to build

To anchor the structure to the ground

Page 278: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 262 REV 1.0

Figure 123 Foundation Works – overview Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 279: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 263 REV 1.0

Figure 124 Backfill and Compaction on Footings Source: JICA, 2014b

For Slab on grade, ensure compaction and soil poisoning steps are followed

Figure 125 Slab on grade preparation Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 280: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 264 REV 1.0

Table 32 Demolition and Groundworks Inspection Form

DEMOLITION AND GROUND WORKS

FORM No. DGW – 1

REV. No.

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE DEMOLITION

Structural assessment of elements Method of works

STAKEOUT Check roads, property boundaries Existing services Building footprint

CLEARING & GRUBBING Removal of rubbish and debris

CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT Set out of excavation Set out of foundations Site elevation established

EXCAVATION Levelling of the site Excavate trench depth and width Check the insitu capacity of the soil

SHORING Use shoring if required Stockpiling of excavated soil

DEWATERING Check for standing water

FOUNDATIONS Use lean concrete in trench if

required Preparation for steel re-bar

installation Backfilling and compaction

SLAB ON GRADE Compaction completed as specified

SOIL POISONING Use Safety and Health equipment Soil poison name used___________ Approved product No ___________ Completed for Foundations Completed for Backfill Completed for Slab-on-grade

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 281: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 265 REV 1.0

Steel Reinforcing Bars Product Identification This section looks at reinforcing steel bars used in concrete construction. The steel reinforcing bars are the partner to concrete, providing the tensile strength to compliment the compressive capacity of concrete.

All steel is required to meet the Philippine National Standards for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, under PNS-49. The ASTM – Specifications A-615 also applies.

Check your Specifications document and BOQ for what has been designed for each structural element. Refer to Table 33 for the PNS Reinforcing Bar Grading and typical applications.

Table 33 PNS Reinforcing Steel Bar Grading

Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

For each delivery of steel check:

Mill Certification provided by the contractor and the product numbers are as per the delivery docket

Markings are as per the POW and Specifications. The end of each bar should be marked with the manufacturers name and the size of the bar.

Size of the bar is shown as a diameter, but it cannot be directly measured. The testing is determined by weighing of 1m in every 10 tons and checking if this is according to the specification. Refer to Figure 126 and Figure 127.

Figure 126 Photograph of Steel Bar grading marks Source: AVID, 2014

Page 282: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 266 REV 1.0

Figure 127 Steel Bar identification mark and PNS Grade Color code Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

Storage Timbers must be placed under the bars and raised above the ground level. Keep free of

mud and organic materials Steel bars must be covered by a roof or plastic material to keep from direct moisture

Preparation Remove all loose rust by striking with a hammer or using a wire brush If the bar is excessively rusted and the cross-sectional area appears to be diminished,

reject the length Remove all oils, coatings, paints and mud before placement Bending of the bars should be done cold Bending and restraightening of bars should be done only once Refer to the Code for the limitations on re-bar bending tolerances for the size of the bar

Rebar Arrangements and Placement Any changes to the specified rebar size and arrangement must be approved before

commencing with fabrication

Bundling of bars should not result in an overall reduction of steel area within the composite structure

Rebar arrangements must allow for the effective compaction of concrete. Consideration should be given to the size of rebar and the aggregate size, especially when considering columns. Figure 128 indicates acceptable bundling arrangements and spacing between formwork.

Page 283: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 267 REV 1.0

Figure 128 Steel re-bar bundling arrangements and spacing Source: JICA, 2014b

Spacers are used to hold the steel rebar in place against the formwork to achieve the specified concrete cover.

Check the specifications and design drawings for your site to identify the required spacing for each structural element. It may vary depending on sub-soil conditions and contact with water/ salt water

Examples of spacers are shown in Figure 129

Figure 129 Examples of re-bar spacers

Page 284: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 268 REV 1.0

Rebar Wires Just like a boy scout knows the right knots to use, so a contractor and an inspector should understand the ties to use to secure the rebar in position for the concrete pouring.

Wire is required to conform to ASTM A-416

Different ties are appropriate to the size of the bar, the work surface, how the adjacent bar is tied and stability of the tie that is required. Refer to Figure 130 for an illustration of wire ties.

Page 285: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 269 REV 1.0

Table 34 identifies the typical applications for use for each of the ties illustrated.

Figure 130 Wire ties for Steel Rebar Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

Page 286: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 270 REV 1.0

Table 34 Tie types for Steel Rebar and when to apply

TIE NAME TECHNIQUE WHEN USED

Snap of Single Tie (A):

Wire is wrapped once around the two crossing bars in a diagonal manner with the two ends twisted together, cut and then flattened to prevent them from snagging clothing and from protruding through the top of concrete.

Used in flat horizontal work.

Wrap and Snap Tie (B):

Wire is wrapped 1 ½ times around the vertical bar, and then diagonally around the intersecting horizontal bar.

Used when tying wall reinforcement to prevent the shifting of horizontal bars.

Saddle Tie (C):

The wire passes halfway around one of the bars on each side of the crossing bar, then brought squarely around the crossing bar, then up and around the first bar where the ends are twisted.

Used for tying of footing or other mats.

Wrap and Saddle Tie (D):

Similar to the saddle tie except that the wire is wrapped 1 ½ times around the first bar before proceeding as in saddle tie.

Double Strand Single Tie (E):

Technique as per single tie A A variation of the single tie, used for heavy work.

Figure Eight Tie (F):

The tying process consists of wrapping a wire once around the nail head; then around the outside bar of the wall and then drawing the bars securely against the nail head by twisting the ends of the wire.

Used in tying reinforcements to a nail employed as spreader or spacer to hold bars away from the forms.

Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

Page 287: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 271 REV 1.0

Splicing Arrangements Splicing is required to connect the lengths of steel rebar for to transfer the stresses from one structural element to another. Incorrect arrangement and splicing of the rebar can contribute to structural failure, especially under peak loading (wind, earthquake movement), or induce cracking of the concrete due to improper deflection. Refer to Figure 131.

Figure 131 Extract from ASSURE Specification for splicing Source: ASSURE, 2014

Page 288: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 272 REV 1.0

Splice Locations for Continuous Beams Refer to Figure 132 for illustrations on acceptable splicing arrangements for beams

Figure 132 Acceptable and Unacceptable Splicing Arrangements for Beams Source: JICA, 2014b

No splice on bottom bar mid-span No splice at top bar support

Splice top bars at mid-span Splice bottom bars at support

Page 289: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 273 REV 1.0

Splice Locations for Cantilever Beams Refer to Figure 133 for acceptable and unacceptable slicing arrangements for cantilever beams

Figure 133 Acceptable and Unacceptable Splicing for cantilever beams Source: JICA, 2014b

No splice on bottom bar cantilever

No splice cantilever on bottom

Splice bottom bars at support Splice top bars on cantilever

Page 290: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 274 REV 1.0

Beam to Column Connection Detail Refer to Figure 134, ensure sufficient development length of the top and bottom beam bars through the column connection

Figure 134 Beam to Column Connection Detail Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 291: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 275 REV 1.0

Splice Locations for Columns Refer to Figure 135 for rebar splicing at mid-column

Figure 135 Splicing Arrangement for Column Source: JICA, 2014b

New Bar Positioned on the outside of the first bar

Page 292: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 276 REV 1.0

Table 35 Steel Rebar Materials Inspection and Fabrication

STEEL REBAR MATERIALS INSPECTION & FABRICATION

FORM No.

SRB – 1

REV. No.

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE SPECIFICATION

Mill certification _____________ Manufacturer markings are legible

and intact Bars are not mis-bent or buckled Quantity and size as specified

STORAGE AND HANDLING Under cover Raised above the ground Free of dirt, heavy rust, grease or

other materials

FABRICATION Bending completed per specification Rebar free from fatigue cracks or

damage Use of wire ties

PLACEMENT Concrete cover of rebars meets or

exceeds specification. Adequate use of spacers

Reinforcement is adequately supported. Footings, tie beams on gravel base if required

Bars are free of loose mortar, grease, rust or other impediments to strong bond

Hook size, length and spacing according to specifications and drawing

SPLICING Columns Beams Beam column connection

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 293: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 277 REV 1.0

Formwork Formwork is required to be strong and secure to hold the weight of the concrete on placement. Understanding the parts of the concrete formwork can help to understand how secure the temporary form is and ability to constrain the concrete.

Good preparation is essential to achieve BBB for construction Remove all debris from inside the form, including sawdust, building debris and sitting water Application of oil to the concrete placement surface Refer to Figure 136 for formwork description and naming conventions Formwork is required to be securely tied and braced or secured so as to maintain the

position and shape when filled with concrete. Formwork should be sufficiently watertight so that mortar does not leak

Figure 136 Formwork Source: NWRC Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

Page 294: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 278 REV 1.0

Formwork for Columns Concrete should not be placed from a height greater than 1.5 meters.

For columns, it is therefore required that concrete is poured in two batches, or as an alternative the formwork has a hatch window allowing placement up to 1.5 m. Refer to Figure 137.

Figure 137 Formwork for column pouring Source: JICA, 2014b

Figure 138 Formwork preparation for roof beam. Safety & Health practice not model Source: Engineering for non-engineers, 2015

Page 295: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 279 REV 1.0

Formwork and Re-bar Placement Problems INSUFFICIENT CONCRETE COVER OVER REINFORCING

What is the problem?

Insufficient depth of concrete cover over the steel reinforcing bars can lead to early corrosion of the steel bars, having an impact on structure durability and design life. Refer to Figure 139.

How to avoid it?

Use spacers when placing the steel re-bars

Ensure the correct tying of bars to hold in position

Check the inside dimensions of the formwork

Check for the squareness of the column/beam connection, re-bars out of square can lead to structural failure during earthquakes

Source: AVID, 2014b

NO COVER TO REINFORCING

NO PROTECTION OF REINFORCING AGAINST CORROSION AND RUST

Figure 139 Showing insufficient Cover over Reinforcing

Page 296: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 280 REV 1.0

Concrete Achieving Quality Concrete This section provides an overview of concrete, key properties, components and how to achieve good quality in its preparation and handling.

The key to achieving strong, durable concrete rests on the selection of ingredients, the careful proportioning, mixing, placement and curing conditions.

The ratio of sand, cement and water vary depending on the ultimate strength and workability required of the concrete mix for good placement. In its final hardened state, concrete is a mix of air (in small voids), cement, water, sand and gravel/crushed rock. Refer to Figure 140 for the approximate percentage proportions of concrete ingredients.

A concrete mixture that does not have enough paste to fill all the voids between the aggregates will be difficult to place and will produce rough, honeycombed surfaces and porous concrete. A mixture with an excess of cement paste will be easy to place and will produce a smooth surface; however, the resulting concrete will be more likely to crack and have poor durability.

In the long term, we want the concrete to be able to perform, and there are a number of things that we can control during construction to achieve the desired qualities of good concrete.

Air 6%

Cement 10%

Water 18%

Sand 25%

Gravel 41%

Figure 140 Typical concrete proportions

Page 297: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 281 REV 1.0

During the construction phase, the uncured qualities of concrete are important to be able to manipulate and place the concrete as required by the design and to be able to meet the design qualities.

Quality Materials - Cement ASTM I: General Purpose Cement is suitable for the majority of building applications. The cement types and performance required of the cement is noted as the ‘types’ and are shown in Table 36.

Table 36 ASTM Concrete Types

CEMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION

TYPE I Normal (various colors for uses)

TYPE II Moderate Sulphate Resistance

TYPE II(MH) Moderate Heat of Hydration (& Moderate Sulphate Resistance)

TYPE III High Early Strength

TYPE IV Low Heat Hydration

TYPE V High Sulphate Resistance

Strength Quality and proportion of the materials used (cement and

aggregates), placement, and the curing conditions such temperature

and moisture

Water tightness Especially important for floor and roof slabs. Water tightness can be

improved by reducing the amount of water in the mix and using non-

porous, durable aggregates.

Durability Ability of the finished concrete to withstand weathering, chemical

action over the life of the structure. The use of a mix with low water

content will prolong the service life of concrete

Consistency Consistency is the wetness of the

uncured concrete mixture. It is measured in terms of slump. The greater the slump, the wetter the

mixture and the easier to place

Workability Workability is the quality of the

incured concrete that permits it to be placed readily in the concrete forms, and ability to be finished

without harmful segregation, such as honeycombing.

Page 298: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 282 REV 1.0

Storage on site Cement bagged should be stored in sacks in shed as airtight as possible and packed closely

together to minimize airflow around the individual bags If no shed is available, store on a raised platform under a waterproof cover tucked down

the sides so that it is waterproof

Quality Materials - Aggregate Fine and coarse aggregate used in concrete shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of the standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate ASTM 033-67 M

The aggregate is required to be washed and screened to remove fine clays from the mix and ensure that the mix is well graded.

Clays affect the effectiveness of bonding of the cement/water mix to the aggregate material. The lack of bonding can cause problems with concrete durability.

Depending on the source of your materials, manual washing and grading maybe required to be conducted onsite. Refer to Figure 141 for an onsite method of screening and washing.

Figure 141 Manual screening and washing of aggregate Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual Fine Aggregate / Sand

Beach sand is not appropriate due to salt content The grading of the fine aggregate/ sand is important as it has an effect on the water content

and material workability Sand is required to be washed Test for the presence of clays and silts

Coarse Aggregate

Coarse Aggregate/ gravel is required to be sound material, without flaky or weak stone Ensure that the aggregate size is as per the specification and is consistent with the structural

member and allows the vibration of the concrete mix when placed Aggregates should never exceed the following:

Page 299: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 283 REV 1.0

o One-fifth (1/5) of the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms o One third (1/3) the depth of the slabs o Three-fourths (3/4) of the minimum clear spacing between the individual reinforcing

bars (or bunched configurations) Generally, the maximum size of aggregate should be the largest that is economically available

and consistent with the dimensions of the structure Try to use aggregate with fractured sides and avoid the use of river stones. River stones are

generally smooth, and do not provide a high level of shear strength in the mix Refer to your specification for the size of aggregate. Grading and the ratio of maximum size for

coarse aggregate is referred to in Table 37.

Table 37 Coarse Aggregate sizes SCREEN OPENING OR APETURE PERCENT BY WEIGHT Passing maximum allowable size 95-100 Passing one-half of maximum allowable size 35-70 Passing Sieve No.4 0-10

Figure 142 Coarse, poorly graded river stone used in RAY Batch 1 Source: AVID, 2014

Stockpiling Aggregate should be stored on leveled ground, removed of vegetation and rubbish, or

better if on a solid surface such as concrete slab or planks Do not build to a cone shape, or allow the materials to run down the heaped slope Keep moisture content consistent through the pile to assist in determining the amount of

water to add for the mix

Quality Materials - Water Water should be sourced from a clean supply and not contain salts, oils, acids, alkali or any

organic substances

Page 300: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 284 REV 1.0

Proportions and Mixing The mix proportions of the cement, aggregate (gravel and sand) and water can be varied depending on what the needs are for workability and strength.

A mix with a greater proportion of water creates a mix that is wetter and easy to place, so this is used where workability of the concrete mix is required.

Less water in the mix creates a stiffer mix, but one that has a greater end strength and durability.

Use the volumetric measuring method for accurate proportions of dry materials. The measurements should be taken from the inner edge of the box. Refer to Figure 143.

The proportions for the different structural members of the cement, sand and coarse aggregate ratio are referred to in Table 38.

Figure 143 Volumetric measuring box Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT CONCRETE SAND GRAVEL

FOOTINGS BEAMS COLUMNS

1 BAG 2 CU FT 4 CU FT

FLOOR SLAB RAMPS 1 BAG 2 ½ CU FT 5 CU FT

FILLER MORTAR & PLASTERING FOR CHB WALL

1 BAG 3 CU FT NIL

Table 38 Concrete proportions for structural members Source: JICA, 2014b

Mixing of the concrete ingredients is best if contained within a mixing board for small batches, either on a board or where water content and contamination can be avoided.

Use of a one-bagger mixer on site

Page 301: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 285 REV 1.0

Figure 144 Mixing methods for concrete, mixing board, contained area and one-bagger mixer

Figure 145 Example of poor concrete mixing method with no control of water content Source: AVID, 2014

Page 302: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 286 REV 1.0

Concrete Testing Testing is required to be conducted for concrete for:

o Slump (workability)

o Compression (strength)

Slump testing indicates the workability of the concrete. The slump test is required to be conducted for each batch to check the workability

Compression testing is conducted at 7, 14 and 28 days to check that the design strength is being achieved. This is important as it indicates that the building has the strength designed for.

METHOD OF SLUMP TEST

1. Fill the cone to quarter depth and tamp 25 times, filling and tamping four times in total until the cone is full and the top smoothed off

2. The cone is then carefully lifted and the slump measured. For consistent mixes, the slump should remain the same for all samples tested. Refer to Table 39 for the allowable slump for structural members.

3. Figure 147 shows the slump test mechanisms of failure and acceptable slump

Figure 146 Concrete Slump Test Source: JICA, 2014b

Table 39 Allowable Concrete Slump for structural members

Source: JICA, 2014b

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT Slump (mm)

Max Min

Reinforced foundation walls and footings 100 50

Reinforced slabs, beams and walls 125 50

Reinforced columns 125 75

Unreinforced footings, caissons, substructure walls 75 25

Page 303: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 287 REV 1.0

Figure 147 Slump test mechanisms Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Concrete_slump_test

COMPRESSION TEST Using a compression testing cylinder take regular samples during the construction for each of

the structural elements A minimum of three samples should be tested regardless of the volume Use DPWH accredited laboratories for the testing at 7, 14 and 21 days

Figure 148 Compression Testing cylinder Source: http://www.swinburne.edu.my/soecs/engineering/engineering-labs

Page 304: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 288 REV 1.0

Concrete Placement CHECKLIST BEFORE COMMENCING:

Personal safety check o Equipment

Equipment and site check o Access to placement site o Vibrator functioning o Water available for wash-down o Clear unnecessary equipment and debris

Cross check formwork and sub-grade o Square and level o Check for damage, gaps and weak spots o Check water-tightness o Check bracing of the forms

Rebar o clear of rust and dirt o clear of concrete spatter from previous pours o properly placed and secured

METHOD: Concrete should be poured within 30 minutes of mixing Any mix not placed within 1 ½ hours should be rejected No concrete should be poured from a height greater than 1.5 meters When pouring slab on grade, start at the furthest part of the slab and working back towards the

source of the concrete mix. Refer to Figure 149.

Figure 149 Concrete pouring of slab on grade Source: JICA, 2014b

PLACING NEW CONCRETE TO EXISTING In bonding existing concrete to new, the old surface should be roughened with a pick to remove

loose material and debris The surface should be moistened and a coat of water/cement mixture about 13 mm thick is

applied Placing of the fresh mix can then commence

Page 305: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 289 REV 1.0

CONCRETE COMPACTION Required to remove pockets of trapped air in the concrete mix A pattern of vibration or rodding should be established so that all concrete is consolidated Under-vibration is more of a concern than over-vibration Use of rodding that penetrates the previous section of laying (in the case of a column) for

manual mixing Hold vertically and for short intervals only, continue to move the machine through the mix.

Refer to Figure 150.

Figure 150 Concrete vibration Source: JICA, 2014b

Curing Curing times for the structural elements – refer to specification for each structural element

Screeding and Finishing of Slabs Level the concrete as it is placed and screed the surface to minimize ponding. Refer to Figure

149

Broom finish slab

Removal of Formwork Remove forms after the specified time, leaving the forms on longer can impact on the

longer term curing of the concrete.

Take care when removing the formwork from corners to minimize damage from chipping

Inspect the concrete for defects, removing loose materials

Small honeycombed and other defective areas must be removed to solid concrete, only shallow patches to be filled with mortar similar to that used in the concrete

Refer to Table 40 for the recommending duration after pouring of concrete for formwork to be removed for each structural element

Page 306: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 290 REV 1.0

Table 40 Duration for Removal of Formwork

ITEM DURATION

Foundation 24 hours

Suspended slab except when additional loads imposed 8 days

Suspended slab 14 days

Beams 14 days

Columns 7 days

Source: JICA, 2014b

Concrete Construction Problems HONEYCOMBING

Why is it a problem? Exposes the steel reinforcing to advanced deterioration Structural strength of the columns not achieved. The building is not safe and unpredictable

under loading conditions Reduce the life of the structure

How to prevent honeycombing?

Conduct a slump test to confirm the characteristics of the mixed batch Check the mix is not separated by not exceeding the 1.5 meter drop restriction Ensure vibrator is used. If vibrator is not operational, use of rodding method Ensure that the aggregate is suitable for the structural element and reinforcing arrangement

Figure 151 Honeycombed concrete column, RAY Batch 1 Source: AVID, 2014

Page 307: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 291 REV 1.0

Table 41 Concrete Materials Inspection Checklist

CONCRETE MATERIALS INSPECTION CHECKLIST

FORM No. CMI

REV. No. 1

PROJECT:

BARANGAY:

WORK ITEM (FORM FOR EACH STRUCTURAL ELEMENT) DESIGN STRENGTH FOUNDATION TIE BEAM SLAB ROOF BEAM

COLUMN SUSPENDED SLAB COLUMN 2-ROOF

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE

COURSE AGGREGATE Supplier/ source inspected Sieve analysis from supplier or

grading on site Aggregate shape/soundness Free from organic materials, mud Aggregate washing on site or by

supplier STORAGE AND HANDLING

Clean and level ground Stockpile arrangement

SAND/FINE AGGREGATE Supplier/ source inspected Sieve analysis from supplier or

grading on site Aggregate shape/soundness Free from organic materials, mud Aggregate washing on site or by

supplier STORAGE AND HANDLING

Clean and level ground Stockpile arrangement

CEMENT Confirm cement type as specified Storage arrangements

WATER Clean free from organic materials Check source

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 308: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 292 REV 1.0

Table 42 Concrete Pouring Request Form

CONCRETE POURING REQUEST FORM FORM No. CPR

REV. No. 1

PROJECT: BARANGAY:

WORK ITEM CONCRETE POURING REQUEST DESIGN STRENGTH FOUNDATION TIE BEAM SLAB ROOF BEAM

COLUMN SUSPENDED SLAB COLUMN 2-ROOF

PARTICULAR (TICK FOR COMPLIANCE) COMMENTS/RECTIFICATION/REMARKS FIRST INSPECTION (2 DAYS BEFORE SCHEDULED POUR)

FINAL INSPECTION

FORMWORK ELEVATION LAYOUT DIMENSIONS SQUARE/PLUMB/LEVEL WATERPROOFING (SLAB) SHORING/ BRACING/SUPPORT APPLICATION OF OIL TO FORM CLEANLINESS OF FORM NO SITTING WATER PRESENT

REBAR WORKS TESTING RECORDS CONSTRUCTION PLAN REBAR CLEAN/ RUST FREE USE OF CONCRETE SPACERS DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS SPLICING LOCATIONS - BEAMS SPLICING LOCATIONS – COLUMNS MINIMUM STIRRUPS INSTALLED

ABOVE CONCRETE TERMINATION FOR VERTICAL STRUCTURES

SERVICES ROUGH IN PLUMBING ELECTRICAL

REFERENCE DRAWINGS /SPECIFICATIONS ATTACHMENT: KEY PLAN

REQUESTED BY: Contractor

Signature

APPROVED BY: Municipal engineer

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 309: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 293 REV 1.0

Table 43 Concrete Slump Test Form

CONCRETE SLUMP TEST FORM No. CST

REV. No. 1

PROJECT:

BARANGAY:

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT Slump (mm) max min

Reinforced foundation walls and footings 100 50 Reinforced slabs, beams and walls 125 50 Reinforced columns 125 75 Unreinforced footings, caissons, substructure walls 75 25

BATCH NO. ITEM POURED SAMPLE REF. No.

SLUMP DESIGN MIX

Ave.Compressive strength (Psi) 7Days 14days 28days

REFERENCE DRAWINGS /SPECIFICATIONS ATTACHMENT: KEY PLAN REQUESTED BY: Contractor

Signature

APPROVED BY: Municipal engineer

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 310: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 294 REV 1.0

Table 44 Concrete Placement Checklist Form

CONCRETE PLACEMENT CHECKLIST

FORM No. CPC

REV. No. 1

PROJECT:

BARANGAY:

WORK ITEM (FORM FOR EACH STRUCTURAL ELEMENT) DESIGN STRENGTH FOUNDATION TIE BEAM SLAB ROOF BEAM

COLUMN SUSPENDED SLAB COLUMN 2-ROOF

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE MIXING

Proportions checked for structural element

Mixing area/ one bagger

PLACEMENT Check duration between mixing and

placement Mechanical vibration Vibration by rodding

COLUMNS & BEAMS Maximum height of placing in columns

1.5 metres COLUMN TO ROOF At the top of the column to the roof, cast

in anchor bolts with template

SLABS Pouring from furthest point, working

towards the source of the concrete Screed the surface Broom finish

CURING Slab on grade use of polyethylene sheet,

ponding method Column, beam and slab

STRIPPING FORMWORK Formwork removal duration Technique for removal Appearance of concrete on stripping

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 311: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 295 REV 1.0

Masonry MANUFACTURE

Check the manufacture of Concrete Hollow Blocks (CHB); ensure that the supplier is using the required cement sand ratio to achieve the design strength for the internal and external blocks. Refer to Table 45

CHB should be sound, dry, clean and free of cracks before commencing laying

CHB that is not waterproof and strong will allow water ingress, leading to deterioration of mortar, re-bar and structural failure

Table 45 Concrete Hollow Block 500 PSI strength

Source: JICA, 2014b

Source: AVID, 2014b

APPLICATION CEMENT : SAND RATIO DIMENSIONS NUMBER OF CHB PIECES

Exterior wall 1:6 150 x 200 x 400 CHB 25 pieces

Interior wall 1:6 100 x 200 x 400 CHB 30 pieces

Figure 152 Defective Masonry Blocks

Page 312: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 296 REV 1.0

METHOD OF PLACEMENT

Use a guide line to ensure walls are straight (vertical) and plumb (horizontal)

Position a horizontal rebar at every 3rd row of blocks and vertical at 400 mm spacing. Refer to Figure 153

Fill each block using a mortar mixture 1:3

After installation of 4 layers, observe 3-4 hours interval before proceeding with the next layers of CHB

Use of lintel beams above openings as per the specification developed in MODULE 3. Refer to Figure 154

Tying together of internal and external masonry walls

Page 313: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 297 REV 1.0

Figure 153 Masonry works - laying CHB Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 314: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 298 REV 1.0

Figure 154 Masonry works - external & internal wall connections and openings Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 315: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 299 REV 1.0

Table 46 Masonry Inspection Form

MASONRY INSPECTION

FORM No. CHB – 1

REV. No.

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE SPECIFICATION

Check manufacturer and strength requirements

Supplier _____________________ Reject broken or fractured blocks Check interior / exterior wall block

LAYING Use of Guide lines Consistent thickness of mortar bed

(approx. 12 mm) Leveling of each block on placement Casting of development bars Horizontal bars every 3rd row Vertical bars at every 400 mm Use rebar between interior and

exterior walls Completely fill blocks with mortar

after laying Allow 3-4 hours between laying rows

LINTELS FOR OPENINGS Formwork, rebar and cast lintels as

per specification Installation of starter bars

ROUGH IN FOR SERVICES Allow for Electrical conduits and

internal switches

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 316: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 300 REV 1.0

Steel Truss Fabrication Damage and failure of roofing was widespread and the majority of the rehabilitation works implemented as part of the RAY program have been repairs and rehabilitation of roofing.

It is not a case of building back the same with roofing, but the real need to build back better, improved materials and techniques to improve the resilience of the structure. There is an immediate BBB need to change the way roofing works are completed, including improving the connections, welding and use of improved roof fixings.

Truss Fabrication All structural steel to be as specified in the design document and as developed in Module 3. The

steel sections are required to be inspected on delivery to the site.

Check for manufacturer markings and corresponding delivery docket information

All sections and plates are required to conform to ASTM A-36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel and with markings corresponding to the Philippines National Standard. For steel equal angle bars refer to Figure 156

Steel is to be kept covered from weather and welding rods are required to be kept dry

Shop drawings as well as erection drawings should be prepared by the contractor for submitting to the engineer prior to work commencing

Shop drawings provide the complete information necessary for the fabrication of component parts of the structure including location, size and type of welds and fixings

Figure 155 shows the naming of the structural components of a steel truss

For fabrication on site, a clean and clear work area is required to be established

The use of gusset plates is recommended to achieve BBB as it enables a full length weld to connect the truss sections strengthening the member connection

Figure 155 Steel Truss members

Source: http://www.civilengineeringx.com/super-structures/roof/

G. I.

Page 317: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 301 REV 1.0

Figure 156 Philippines National Standard for Steel Angle Bars

Page 318: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 302 REV 1.0

Welding Getting the weld right is a critical part of the roof truss system.

Welding is a process which melts and joins metals by heating with an arc (high heat source), a metal electrode and a base metal. The outer coating on the electrode assists in the melting process and the inner section of the electrode forms the weld. When the heated electrode is moved along the base metal (also heating the base metal), this forms the bead – the molten form of the weld.

The performance of the structural connection is dependent on the quality of the weld, which is influenced by the materials used, the preparation of the surface and the technique of the weld operator.

A poor weld can at worst damage the base metal, separate from the metal or fail due to cracking or defects. It is important to follow the steps outlined and practice before commencing on the steel members to ensure that the technique of the weld operator is acceptable.

The application of good welding techniques and the use of gusset plates will greatly improve the performance of the roof structure.

Pay particular attention to the technique of the welder to ensure that the weld is of the highest possible strength

Acceptable and defective weld profiles for butt welds and fillet welds are shown in Figure 157. Butt welds join two pieces of metal at their edge, where a fillet weld connects two sections at 90 degrees

Page 319: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 303 REV 1.0

Figure 157 Acceptable and Defective Welds Source: NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

Welding Techniques Follow all Occupational Safety and Health precautions, including the use of personal safety gear

for workers

It is preferable to conduct welding in a controlled environment, where quality can be monitored.

Welding at ground level is preferable to welding vertically

Do a test weld before commencing working on the structural steel member connection

Always clean surfaces to bright metal before welding

Ensure that the welding electrodes are suitable for the purpose and have been stored correctly prior to use

Refer Figure 158 to for guidance on achieving a good quality weld, noting the important techniques to achieve the right bead size and dimensions including:

o Electrode angle to the base metal

o The height of the arc above the base metal

o The travel speed – or how fast the work is being done

Page 320: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 304 REV 1.0

Figure 158 Weld Technique Source: Miller

Refer to Figure 159 for technique on how to move the arc and electrode to achieve a smooth bead on a butt weld and Figure 160 for fillet welding technique for tee joints, typically used in truss fabrication.

Page 321: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 305 REV 1.0

Figure 159 Electrode Movement during welding Source: Miller

Figure 160 Welding Tee sections

Source: Miller

Page 322: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 306 REV 1.0

Figure 161 shows poor weld bead charateristics, and Figure 162 shows good weld bead characterstics

Figure 161 Poor weld bead characteristics Source: Miller

Figure 162 Good weld bead characteristics Source: Miller

Page 323: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 307 REV 1.0

Weld Defect Identification and Rectification

Figure 163 Porosity

Figure 164 Excessive Splatter

Figure 165 Incomplete Fusion

Page 324: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 308 REV 1.0

Figure 166 Lack of Penetration

Figure 167 Excessive Penetration

Figure 168 Burn through

Figure 169 Waviness of Bead

Page 325: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 309 REV 1.0

Figure 170 Distortion

Source: Miller

Weld Test Field test of the weld soundness

Strike against the weld to check for any signs of cracking or weakness

Check the weld before any coatings applied

Figure 171 Weld field test Source: Miller

Page 326: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 310 REV 1.0

Welding Problems What is the problem?

Welding and truss fabrication inspected during RAY Batch 1 implmentation has shown examples of poor welding technique and lack of gusset plates. Refer to Figure 172

How to avoid it?

Improve the welding technique

Electrode size choice for the steel member is suitable

Use of appropriately sized gusset plates

Figure 172 RAY batch 1 welding of trusses Source: AVID, 2014

Page 327: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 311 REV 1.0

Table 47 Truss Fabrication Inspection Form

TRUSS FABRICATION INSPECTION

FORM No. TFI

REV. No. 1

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE SPECIFICATION

Mill certification received Manufacturer markings are legible

and intact Sections not mis-bent or buckled

STORAGE AND HANDLING Steel elevated above ground level Covered Storage of solder in a dry location

WELDING Surface preparation Weld technique Refer to check for acceptable and

unacceptable welds Field check of weld strength

GUSSET PLATES Check specified thickness Weld technique

COATINGS Apply coatings for steel and weld

protection as specified Ensure surface is cleaned before

application of paints/primer

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 328: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 312 REV 1.0

Truss and Roofing Installation Column to Truss Connections To achieve BBB, the use of anchor bolts to connect truss to column is a good solution, as discussed in the options analysis of Module 3.

The anchored bolts are preferable to re-bar commonly used for roofing connections; the relatively small increase in investment significantly improves the connection strength and reduces the possibility of structural connection failure.

The anchor bolts have been cast in to the top of the column with a template for the bolted arrangement. Refer to Figure 173.

Inspection of the works during the truss installation ensures that problems and issues are identified, including any issues with alignment, spacing of the trusses and ensuring that trusses are positioned directly on top of columns for effective transfer of loads

Figure 173 Base Plate Anchor Bolt Connection Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 329: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 313 REV 1.0

Truss Connection Problems CONNECTION STRENGTH & ALIGNMENT OF TRUSS TO COLUMNS

What is the problem?

Use of rebar as the restraint for the roof truss– insufficient restraint against uplift forces

Truss not connected to the column – cannot transfer forces and provide restraint against uplift forces

Lack of base plates at column truss connection

How to avoid it?

To achieve BBB in your structure, it is recommended to use anchor bolts for connection of column to truss. The use of bent re-bar is not recommended

Ensure that the spacing and alignment of trusses is as per the specification and relates to the actual building arrangements

Use full weld truss connections to gusset plate

Refer to Figure 174 for examples of RAY Batch 1 implementation truss to column connection problems

Figure 174 Truss Column connection problems, RAY Batch 1 implementation. Use of bent rebar & non-alignment examples Source: AVID, 2014

Page 330: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 314 REV 1.0

Truss Installation Trusses are required to be installed with lateral and cross bracing to provide stability during the

erection phase. Refer to Figure 175

Figure 175 Roof truss installation guide Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 331: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 315 REV 1.0

Purlin and Roof System Install purlins using the specified fixings; decrease the purlin spacing over the eaves. Refer to

Figure 176

Check roof sheeting is the specified thickness and has manufacturer markings. Refer to Figure 177

Overlap roof sheeting as required (2 ½ corrugations for valley/ ridge profile)

The use of J-bolts to connect roof sheeting to purlins is a good BBB solution. Refer to Figure 178

The use of Tek screws is an acceptable BBB solution

Use of flashing on the roofing/eaves

Installation of fascia boards, guttering and downpipes with fixings as specified

Figure 176 Purlin & Roof sheeting installation Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 332: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 316 REV 1.0

Figure 177 Roof Sheeting Guide

Page 333: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 317 REV 1.0

Figure 178 J-Bolt Installation Guide Source: JICA, 2014b

Page 334: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 318 REV 1.0

Table 48 Truss Installation and Roofing Inspection Form

TRUSS INSTALLATION AND ROOFING INSPECTION

FORM No. TIRI – 1

REV. No.

ACTIVITY COMMENTS/ RECTIFICATION & DATE MATERIALS AS SPECIFIED

Purlins check manufacturer markings

Bracing as specified Roof sheeting thickness as specified Fixings supplied as specified

INSTALLATION OF TRUSSES Cross bracing and lateral cross

bracing installed Purlin installation and spacing

CONNECTION OF TRUSS TO COLUMNS Ensure alignment of truss with

column Alignment of bolted connections to

welded plate

ROOF SHEETING Commence placing the roof

sheeting on the lea side of the building, on the lower portion of the roof area

Ensure adequate overlap of vertical sheets

Ensure corrugations are overlapped at least 2 ½ valley/ crown

J-BOLT INSTALLATION Follow instructions for installation,

drill holes, use of gasket & fastening of nut

Decrease spacing of J-bolts on the edges of the roof or use steel angle across bolts

FASCIA, GUTTERING & DOWNPIPES Installation of fascia with specified

fixings Install guttering with supporting

brackets to specification and leaf covering if available

ISSUED BY: Municipal Engineer

Signature

RECEIVED BY: (Contractor/ Site Supervisor)

Signature

DATE & TIME

Page 335: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 319 REV 1.0

Timber The use of coco lumber is not recommended for structural members. Refer to the NSCP for

structural timbers suitable for framing

Refer to Figure 179 for structural timber member naming convention

Apply the use of gusset plates to strengthen connections

Apply the use of tie straps at truss/wall plate connections

Apply the use of bracing to resist lateral wind forces

Nailing of members not through end grain, but angled to side member as shown in Figure 180

Figure 179 Timber Frame members

Page 336: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 320 REV 1.0

Figure 180 Nailing of timber members Source: National Structural Code of the Philippines

Module 4 Finalization and BBB Compliance The Finalization of Module 4 collates and checks the Quality Inspection forms that have been completed during the construction stage.

Use the Module 4 Finalization and BBB Compliance Form to complete a check of the elements of the project that have been completed in preparation for Punchlisting.

Having the Quality Forms completed during the course of the project ensures that any issues have already been identified and resolved, and this can speed up the Punchlisting process, with minimal rectification works required.

Page 337: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 321 REV 1.0

Module 4 Finalization and BBB Compliance Purpose of Form: To review of the construction phase of the project, check compliance and the completion of the BBB Inspection and Testing results.

Collation of the marked up drawings, Current BOQ, Current Schedule and Current POW (Revised if applicable) are required for Punchlisting of the project.

Project Information

Region:

Province:

City/Municipality:

Barangay:

Building Name:

Building Address:

Building Contact Person:

Contact Person’s Address:

Contact Person’s No.:

DOCUMENTATION CHECK – BBB IMPLEMENTATION QUALITY CHECK

DOCUMENTATION COMPLETED Y/N

COMMENTS/RECTIFICATION

POW& BOQ

Includes revisions during implementation

Changes of quantity, volumes recorded

SCHEDULE

Variations of time approved

Changes to original schedule

DRAWINGS

Construction details marked

Corrections marked

QUALITY INSPECTION FORMS AND CHECKLISTS

Completed and signed for elements included in the POW/BOQ

Check against the BoQ for required inspection forms

PRE-CONSTRUCTION PROJECT CONTROL

Page 338: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 322 REV 1.0

FORMS

Pre-construction Meeting Agenda

Daily Activity Record (for each workday)

Request for Variation Order

Site Instruction Form

Safety Inspection Checklist

Construction Accident Report Form (for any accident)

CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION PROCESS

Demolition and Ground works

Steel Rebar Materials Inspection and Fabrication

Concrete Materials Inspection Checklist

Concrete Pouring Request

Concrete Slump Test

Concrete Placement checklist

Masonry Inspection

Truss Fabrication Inspection

Truss and Roofing Installation

Prepared by: Reviewed by:

Signature: _________________ Signature: _________________

Name: ____________________ Name: ____________________

Role: _____________________ Role: _____________________

Page 339: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 323 REV 1.0

Construction Completion Punchlisting and Rectification Using the current POW/BOQ, Schedule and Working Drawings during the implementation stage, conduct Punchlisting of the project at 90% completion.

• Develop the Punchlist for inspection from the updated POW/BOQ items, including approved project variations

• Refer to the Inspection checklists already completed for the main structural elements (Module 4 Finalization and BBB Compliance)

• Check for BBB Quality and conformance with the updated specifications and drawings • Ensure that services (such as water, electricity, plumbing etc) have the appropriate Certificates

in accordance with the National Building Code of the Philippines • Record actions required for Rectification using the developed Punchlisting Form • Follow up the Rectification actions

Turnover Provide to the building owner with a complete record of the project including:

• As constructed Drawings, Specifications, Final Schedule, updated BOQ • Copies of relevant Building Certifications • Handover of suggested Building Maintenance Plan • Checklist for the Certificate of Final Acceptance (to be conducted at the one year anniversary of

turnover)

Page 340: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 324 REV 1.0

•�98�•� � � �� FINAL�DRAFT� �

PUNCHLISTING�FORM�-�EXAMPLE�

Region:� �

Province:� �

City/Municipality:�� �

Barangay:� �

Building�Name:� �

Building�Address:� �

Building�Contact�Person:� �

Contact�Person’s�Address:� �

Contact�Person’s�No.:� ��

Particular Work Accomplished Significant Observation Partially Totally Not

Applicable Ground Floor

1. Foundation

2. Columns

3. Beams

4. Shear/Masonry Walls

5. Flooring

6. Stairways

7. Entrance/Room Doors

8. Windows

9. Ceiling

10. Toilet Accessories (M/F)

11. Plumbing

-Water Supply

-Sewerage

12. Electrical Accessories

-Lightings

-Switches

-Outlets

-Main Switch Cabinets

-Meter

13. Painting

Second Floor

1. Walls

2. Windows

3. Doors

4. Flooring

5. Ceiling

6. Fire Exit Door & Ladder

7. Toilet & Accessories (M/F)

8. Plumbing

-Water Supply

-Sewerage

9. Electrical Accessories

-Lightings

-Switches

-Outlets

10. Painting

Roofing

1. Truss

2. Truss Base Plate

3. Truss Anchorage

4. Tension and Sag Rods

4. Purlins

5. Fascia Board

6. Roof Sheets

7. Gutter

8. Flashing

9. Ridge Roll

10. Downspout

11. Ceiling

12. Ceiling Eaves

13. Paraphet wall

14. Painting

15. Air Ventilation

D. ANCILLARY ITEMS

1. Electrical System

2. Water Supply

3. Sanitary Piping System

4. Communication Facilities

E. Building Site

1. Ground/sorroundings

2. Drainages

3. Septic tank

4. Perimeter Fence/Steel gate

DATE OF AGREED RE-INSPECTION

Page 341: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 325 REV 1.0

PROJECT CLOSING

This section of the BBB Operations manual covers:

■ Certificate of Final Acceptance

■ Maintenance Plan

■ BBB Lessons Learnt

■ Update to Land use plan

Page 342: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 326 REV 1.0

Certificate of Final Acceptance To meet the minimum contract performance requirements, the Contractor is required to rectify any construction and materials defects a year from project turnover.

Ensure that the documentation is in place to be able to conduct a meaningful warranty inspection and rectification of issues if required.

To prepare, keep on the project file the following documentation:

• As Constructed Drawings, the BOQ /POW • Record the final building with photographs for comparison with one year warranty period • Conduct an inspection and consult with building beneficiaries to determine any problems, ie

leaking roof, guttering, window openings etc

Developing a Maintenance Plan Allocating a small amount of maintenance funding each year is much better for a building, and more cost effective, than large injections of funds every 20 years or so. People often think that once a building has been repaired or newly constructed it doesn’t need to be looked at again for many years.

But many major repairs to infrastructure could have been prevented if simple things like leaking down-pipes and gutters had been cleaned out or repaired quickly.

To ensure that building condition is known, it is recommended to conduct the Local Infrastructure Audit Form annually, the process outlined in module 1 as an early preparation action.

The main reason for a maintenance plan is that it is the most cost-effective way to maintain the value of the building investment. The advantages of a plan are:

• the infrastructure maintained in a systematic rather than ad-hoc way • building services can be monitored to assist their efficient use • the standard and presentation of the infrastructure can be maintained • subjective decision making and emergency corrective maintenance are minimized

When infrastructure is neglected, defects can occur which may result in extensive and avoidable damage, especially during high winds and typhoons, with flow on damage to surrounding infrastructure or other components of the building.

Table 49 provides some suggested checks and actions to develop a maintenance plan. It will depend on the nature of your structure and local conditions

Page 343: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 327 REV 1.0

Table 49 Building Maintenance Planning

BUILDING COMPONENT SUGGESTED CHECKS FREQUENCY BUDGET REQUEST

Roofing & Guttering Clean guttering from leaves and debris

Check guttering and downpipes are secure

Check roof fixings are secure

Check eaves are secure and fixed

Seasonal

External walls Check for cracking and settlement

Repair and patch

Maintain painted surfaces to protect mortar and waterproofing

Annual inspection

Windows and openings Check for leaks during rain

Repair doors/ window openings

Annual inspection/

maintenance

BBB Lessons Learnt Inclusion in the BBB Operations Manual

Following the turnover of the project, there is an opportunity to review the delivered project, reflecting on what we’ve learnt and how our knowledge on building resilient infrastructure has improved. It is also an opportunity to share things that didn’t work so well with colleagues, so that they can also avoid similar issues.

Are there updates or further information we can add to the BBB Operations Manual? • Can we share our experience (good and not so good) with our LGU colleagues? • What improvements can we apply with construction practices or design documentation? • Were we able to include the ideas and concepts that we identified in dreaming better? If not

why not? Could we progressively include the ideas and concepts later? Or for the next project?

Page 344: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 328 REV 1.0

Update Land Use Plan Land use planning, when used as a tool and as a continuously updated process can provide clarity and a strong legal backing for decision making around the provision of infrastructure. It is essential that the CLUP and zoning ordinance are living documents however, and are updated frequently. At the closing stage of a project ensure the following are updated:

• Hazard maps should be updated to demonstrate the reality of what occurred during a calamity

event (and the updates should be compared alongside any modelling/forecasts) • Zoning requirements should be updated to ensure that based on the new information we have

gathered both during and after a calamity event that land use zones remain suitable • Design requirements for buildings should be specified based on observed data (for example

finished floor levels for buildings

REFERENCES

Module 1 – Pre and Post Event Infrastructure Assessment

Philippine Disaster Recovery Foundation; Deltares; National University of Singapore, Feb 2013, Recommended PDA Guidance Notes, Capacity Building for Post-Disaster Assessments in the Philippines Contract 7162294, World Bank, Pp. I-1, I-3, I-6, XIII-1, XIII-4, XIII-5-7,

LGA DILG, 2015, LGUs Disaster Preparedness Manual – Minimum Critical Preparations for Mayors, Typhoon Edition v2, DILG, Pp. 10, 16, 17, 22

LGA DILG, 2015, LGUs Disaster Preparedness Manual – Checklist of Early Preparations for Mayors, Typhoon Edition v2, DILG, Pp. 4, 5

LGA DILG, 2015, LGUs Disaster Preparedness Manual – Checklist for MLGOOs, COPs, and FMOs, Typhoon Edition v2, DILG, Pp. 12, 23, 38

Roxas Mar, Dec 27 2013, DILG MC No. 150 Series of 2013, DILG, Pp. 3

Module 2 – BBB Project Scope Asia Development Bank 2014, Handbook for Rooftop Solar Development in Asia, ADB, Metro Manila.

Page 345: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 329 REV 1.0

City of Melbourne, 2008, CH2 How It Works, Council House 2 – Our Green Building, Melbourne.

http://www.melbourne.vic.gov.au/sustainability/ch2/Pages/CH2Ourgreenbuilding.aspx

CoDesign Studio, 2010, CoDesign Rapid Urban Revitalization Toolkit, Melbourne.

www.codesignstudio.com.au

D. Prasad, T. Uliate and M. Rafiuddin Ahmed, 2009, Wind Loading on Low-rise Building Models with Different Roof Configurations, International Journal of Fluid Mechanics Research, School of Engineering and Physics, Faculty of Science and Technology, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji

Your Home: Australia's Guide to Environmentally Sustainable Homes , Australian Government. www.yourhome.gov.au

Module 3 – BBB Detailed Design, Documentation, Development and Verification

JICA 2015, Lessons Learnt from damage to buildings by Bohol Earthquake and Typhoon Yolanda 2013 in the Philippines.

Institute for Steel Development and Growth, Teaching Material, Chapter 33 – Bolted Connections Accessed via www.steel-insdag.org/TeachingMaterial/chapter33.pdf, 20th June 2015.

Rodford Edmiston 2006, The Joy of High Tech - Fascinating Subject, accessed www.dcr.net/~stickmak/JOHT/joht37fascinating.htm, 20th June 2015.

Module 4 – BBB Construction and Quality

JICA 2014b, Simplified Construction Handbook for School Buildings, DPWH, JICA, DEPED

National Structural Code of the Philippines 2010, 6th Edition

Miller 5595 E 2013−07 Process Guidelines For Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)

NWRC RWS Volume II, Construction and Installation Manual

Page 346: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL PAGE 330 REV 1.0

3D Construction Modeling, 2014, https://insitebuilders.wordpress.com/, June 2015

ASSURE, 2014, Proposed Design of a 1-Storey Disaster Resilient Barangay Hall Specifications

Page 347: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE i REV 1.0

APPENDICES

Appendix A. Other information sources for useful baseline data

Sector/Data Scope Responsible Agency

I. DemographyA. Population Composition NSO

1. Total PopulationNational, Provincial, City, Municipal, Barangay

2. Total Population by Age Group, Sex,Urban-Rural

National, Provincial, City, Municipal, Barangay

3. Population Growth RateNational, Provincial, City, Municipal

4. Population DensityNational, Provincial, City, Municipal

5. Sex Ratio of PopulationNational, Provincial, City, Municipal

B. Labor1. Labor Force Participation Rate, Employment, Unemployment, and Underemployment Rate Regional2. Employment Status of the Household Population 15 Years Old and Over and Total Underemployed 3. Employment Status of the Household Population 15 Years Old and Over and Total Underemployed National4. Population 15 Years Old and Over by Employment Status Including Overseas Workers National

II. SocialHuman Development Index Regional, Provincial NSCB

A. Housing HUDCC1. Housing Need (Housing Backlog) National, City, Municipal2. Housing projects undertaken by the national government National, City, Municipal3. Available housing units from gov't housing projects National, City, Municipala. NHA Resettlement National, City, Municipalb. HDMF - End User Financing National, City, Municipalc. CMP National, City, Municipal4. No. of informal settlers families benefitted from presidential issuances on security of land tenure (Presidential Proclamations) National, City, Municipal5. Housing projects undertaken by the private sectorNational, City, Municipal HLURB6. Others a. Jobs generated from gov't housing projects National

Page 348: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE ii REV 1.0

B. Education1. Simple Literacy Rate of the Population 10 years and Over Regional NSO, Dep Ed2. Functional Literacy Rate of the Population 10 years and Over NSO, Dep Ed3. Enrolment in elementary and secondary public and private schools

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed

4. Ratio of girls to boys in primary and secondary education

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed

5. Net participation rate in elementary and secondary public and private schools

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed

6. Cohort survival rate in public and private elementary and secondary school

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed

7. Teacher - Pupil Ratio in government elementary and secondary schools

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed

8. No of public and private schools by level of education

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed,CHED

9. No. of teachers in public school by level of education

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed,CHED

10. No. of elementary school books distributed Regional Dep Ed

11. Higher education enrolment by discipline groupNational, Provincial, City, Municipal CHED

12. Higher education graduates by discipline groupNational, Provincial, City, Municipal CHED

13. Enrolment in TVET programsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal TESDA

14. Graduates of TVET programsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal TESDA

15. No. of public and private schools per level of education

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed, CHED

16. No. of classrooms in public and private schools per level of education

National, Provincial, City, Municipal Dep Ed, CHED

C. HealthNational, Provincial, City, Municipal

1. No. of live birthsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal NSO

2. Birth ratesNational, Provincial, City, Municipal NSO

3. No. of mortalities by age and sexNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

4. Mortality rateNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

5. Ten leading causes of mortality National, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

6. No. of Infant deathsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

Page 349: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE iii REV 1.0

7. Infant and child mortalityNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

8. Under five mortality rateNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

9. Ten leading causes of infant mortality, number, and rate (rate per 1,000 live births)

National, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

10. Maternal mortality rateNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

11. Projected total fertility rate Regional NSCB12. Projected life expectancy at birth Regional NSCB

13. Ten leading causes of morbidyNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

14. Morbidity rateNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

15. No. of government and private hospitalsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

16. No. of barangay health stationsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

17. No. of rural health stationsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

18. Bed capacity of government and private hospitalsNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

19. No. of doctors, nurses, dentists, and midwives in government and private hospitals

National, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

20. Contraceptive prevalence rateNational, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

20. No. of persons with access to RH commodities by type of commodity

National, Provincial, City, Municipal DOH

21. Total health expenditure per capita National NSCB

22. Prevalence of malnutrition over 0-5 children RegionalFood and Nutrition Research Institute

23. No. of households by main source of water supply for drinking and/or cooking

National, Provincial, City, Municipal NSO

24. No. of households by type of toilet facilityNational, Provincial, City, Municipal NSO

25. No. of households by usual manner of waste disposal

National, Provincial, City, Municipal NSO

D. Social Services

1.No. of PWDs by type of disabilityNational, Provincial, City, Municipal NSO

2. Unduplicated no. of clients served by the DSWD

National, Provincial, City, Municipal DSWD

3. No. of institutions/centers/facilities involved in the distribution of social services

National, Provincial, City, Municipal DSWD

4. No. of reported cases of child abuse cases attended by DSWD by type of abuse and sex

National, Provincial, City, Municipal DSWD

Page 350: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE iv REV 1.0

E. Poverty1. Subsistence incidence National, Regional, Provincial NSCB2. Inflation National NSCB3. Annual per capita food threshold National NSCB4. average per capita income National, Regional, Provincial NSCB5. Poverty incidence National, Regional, Provincial NSCB6. Magnitude of food poor families Regional NSCB7. Magnitude of poor families Regional NSCB

III. Economy1. Gross national product and gross domestic product by expenditure share National NSCB2. Gross national product and gross domestic product by industrial origin National NSCB3. GNP and GDP per capita National NSCB4. Personal consumption expenditures National, Regional NSCB5. National accounts National NSCB6. Gross value added in agriculture, fishery, and forestry by industry group National NSCB7. Gross value added in quarrying and mining by industry group National NSCB8. Gross value added in manufacturing by industry group National NSCB9. Gross value of construction and gross value added in construction National NSCB10. Gross value added in electricity, gas, and National NSCB11. Gross value added in transportation, communication, and storage National NSCB12. Gross value added in trade National NSCB13. Gross value added in finance by industry National NSCB14. Gross value added in ownership of dwellings and real estate by industry group National NSCB15. Gross value added in other services by industry group National NSCB16. Gross regional domestic product Regional NSCB17. Gross value added in agriculture, fishery, and forestry by region Regional NSCB18. Gross value added in quarrying and mining by region Regional NSCB19. Gross value added in manufacturing and mining by region Regional NSCB19. Gross value added in construction by region Regional NSCB20. Gross value added in electricity, gas, and water by region Regional NSCB21. Gross value added in service sector by region Regional NSCB22. Gross regional domestic product per capita Regional NSCB

Page 351: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE v REV 1.0

23. Expenditures on gross regional domestic product Regional NSCB24. Government consumption expenditures by region Regional NSCB25. Gross value in construction by region Regional NSCB26. Gross domestic capital formation by durable equipment by region Regional NSCB27. Gross domestic capital formation in breeding stocks and orchard development by region Regional NSCB28. Inventory of agricultural lands DA, DAR29. Agricultural production (volume and value of major crops and fish production)

Regional, Provincial, City, Municipal DA

30. Food self-sufficiency index DA31. Per Capita Volume of Production (Forestry) Regional, Provincial, City,

MunicipalDENR - FMB

32. Volume and value of mining/quarrying production

Regional, Provincial, City, Municipal DENR - MGB

33. DOT - accredited establishmentsRegional, Provincial, City, Municipal DOT

34. Tourist arrivals by country of origin National, Regional DOT35. Tourist arrivals by country of origin and by mode of travel National, Regional DOT36. Tourist arrivals by country of residence and by age group National, Regional DOT37. Air visitor arrival by country of residence and purpose of travel National, Regional DOT38. No. of visitor arrivals, average daily expenditure, average length of stay, and amount of visitor receipts National DOT39. Average no. of rooms and occupancy rates of hotels by hotel category by region Regional DOT40. Labor force participation rate National, Regional, Provincial NSO,DOLE41. Employment and unemployment rate National, Regional, Provincial NSO,DOLE

IV. EnvironmentA. Land1. Status of land classification National, regional, provincial NAMRIA2. No. of households by land ownership National, regional, provincial NSO3. No. of endangered, rare, and threatened wildlife species National DENR - PAWB4. Area reforested by the government and private sector National, regional, provincial DENR - FMB5. Status of forests National, regional, provincial DENR - FMB

B.Air

Page 352: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE vi REV 1.0

6. Average concentration of total suspended particulates (TSP) (ug/Ncm) and SO2 (ppm) in the atmosphere by air quality monitoring stations in the NCR NCR EMB7. Stationary source of emissions in NCR NCR EMB8.Annual consumption of CFCs National EMB9. Average daily waste volume collected by NCR cities NCR EMB

C. Water10. Annual average dissolved oxygen (DO) and biological oxygen demand (BOD) concentration in NCR rivers NCR EMB12. Mangrove areas National, regional, provincial DENR - PAWB13. Coral reef and coral cover National, regional, provincial DENR - PAWB14. Marine protected area National, regional, provincial DENR - PAWB15. Surface and groundwater quality National, regional, provincial EMB16. Location Map of Major River Basins17. Ground Water Availability Maps18. Water Resources (Regional)

D. Solid Waste19. Solid waste management facility by type, status, and location

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal NSWMC

E. Geophysical environment PAGASA20. Average amount of rainfall National, regional, provincial,

city, municipal PAGASA21. Average wind speed National, regional, provincial,

city, municipal PAGASA22. Average atmospheric temperature National, regional, provincial,

city, municipal PAGASA23. Geotechnic Schematic Distribution of Geological System National DPWH

F. Natural Disasters24. Selected River Basins under Flood Risk Mitigation National DPWH25. Typhoon - Related Damages National, regional, provincial DPWH26. Average Annual Road Closure Damages National, regional, provincial DPWH27. Estimated Flood Damage Casualty Along Selected River Basins National, regional, provincial DPWH28. Estimated Cost of Flood Damage Assessment National, regional, provincial DPWH29. Estimated Flood Frequency based on Flood Damage Assessment National, regional, provincial DPWH, PAGASA30. Risk of Typhoons National, regional, provincial DPWH31. Frequency of Tropical Cyclone Occurrence National, regional, provincial DPWH, PAGASA

Page 353: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE vii REV 1.0

32. Combined Risk to Climate Disasters National, regional, provincial DPWH, PAGASA, PHIVOLCS33. Forces that can damage the locality, e.g. wind for typhoon and tornado; water (heavy rain, flood, river overflow, giant waves)

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal PAGASA

34Hazard-prone urban areas National, regional, provincial, city, municipal PAGASA

35. Flood-prone areas* National, regional, provincial, city, municipal PAGASA

36. Historical Storm Surges Occurrences in the Philippines

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal PAGASA

37. Climatology of Tropical Cyclone Occurrences and Tracks in the Philippines National, regional, provincial PAGASA38. Tornado Hazard Map of the Philippines National, regional, provincial,

city, municipal PAGASA39. Rainfall Intensity Duration Frequency (RIDF) National, regional, provincial,

city, municipal PAGASA

G. Maps

40. Isohyetal MapNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

41.Topographic MapsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

42. Administrative MapsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

43. Regional MapsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

44. Provincial MapsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

45. Nautical ChartsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

46. Hydrographic Smooth SheetsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

47. Land Classification MapsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

48. Preliminary Map DataNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal NAMRIA

V. Infrastructure

A. Roads, Bridges, Flood control systemsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

49. List of National Road SectionsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

50. National Road Lengths by Classification, Surface Type, and Summary

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

51. Summary of Provincial RoadsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

Page 354: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE viii REV 1.0

52. Existing National Bridges (Length and Number) by Type

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

53. Local Roads Converted to National RoadsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

54. Flood ControlNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

55. Nautical HighwaysNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

B. Traffic and Transportation

56. Annual Average Daily Traffic National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

57. Seasonal Traffic Conversion FactorsNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

58. Equivalent Axle Load Factors and OverloadNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

59. Summary of Road Traffic Accidents by RegionNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

60. Summary of Road Traffic Accidents by District Engineering Office

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

61. Location/Status of Weighbridge Stations Nationwide

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

62. Motor Vehicle Registered by RegionNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

63. Motor Vehicle Registered by Type of Fuel Used by Region

National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

64. Motor Vehicle Density by RegionNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

65. Traffic Flow Map (Nationwide)National, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

66. Traffic Flow Map by RegionNational, regional, provincial, city, municipal DPWH

Page 355: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE ix REV 1.0

Appendix B. Background information on the PDNA

Note; This section is, a summary of Section I – Introduction & Section XIII – Governmental Sector of the Recommended PDA Guidance Notes (PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

Background to PDNA

“The post-disaster damage and needs assessment methodology [known as the PDNA or PDA],… initially developed by the United Nations Economic Commission for Latin America and the Caribbean (ECLAC, 2003), is increasingly recognized as the standard for recovery and reconstruction assessment at national levels. The ECLAC methodology was further refined, expanded, operationalized and documented in the guidelines for damage, loss and needs assessment (GFDRR, 2010). At present, this methodology is the internationally accepted approach in assessing post-disaster damages, losses and needs. [It]… is a multi-sectoral and multidisciplinary structured approach for assessing disaster impacts and prioritizing recovery and reconstruction needs. It should be led and undertaken by the government after a disaster, with the collaboration of international development partners and the private sector. [It]… is intended to estimate firstly the short-term interventions that are required to initiate recovery from the damages and losses and secondly the financial requirements of programs and projects to achieve overall post-disaster recovery, reconstruction and risk management.”

(PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013).

Broadly speaking, it is a rapid assessment of the needs of a community Post Disaster, covering many sectors ranging from Agriculture to Trade and Tourism to Environmental.

The PDNA will be initiated by the Government of the Philippines shortly after a disaster. “The PDA should not begin until humanitarian assistance stage is completed or well underway. In the initial stages after a disaster, priority must be given to emergency assistance and resources are usually utilized for emergency activities. However, the assessment should not be unnecessarily delayed as there is an urgent need to elicit support from the international community, whose attention may quickly be diverted in other parts of the world. Similarly, the national government must soon have an overview of funding and resources required for recovery and reconstruction In carrying out a PDA, there should be a balance between speed and accuracy. Speed is more important than 100% accuracy. Nevertheless, a PDNA should aim for highest possible accuracy”

(PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

“The final PDA, consisting of the damages and losses of all sectors, the potential impacts, the framework and identified programs and projects for recovery and reconstruction, will be presented by the OCD to the NDRRMC, international development partners and other stakeholders.”

(PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

Page 356: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE x REV 1.0

In terms of infrastructure, the PDNA provides the following definitions; Totally destroyed. Structures… which are visibly completely destroyed or unusable and

need replacement. Included also are structures that have suffered irreparable structural damage and need total rebuilding or new construction. (PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

Partially damaged. Affected structures… that can be repaired or reused and whose structural integrity has not been compromised. (PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

PDNA Process

Following a disaster, Baseline information for LGU Infrastructure costs, see section 1.2.1, will be used to estimate the damage caused by the disaster.

Collaboration & validation then occurs between Sectoral Assessment teams to ensure there is no double counting between sectors.

Identified impacts of the disaster are relayed to the relevant agencies; Social impacts to DSWD, Environmental impacts to DENR, Macro-Economic impacts to NEDA & DRR impacts to OCD.

Recovery & reconstruction needs are then estimated and programs & projects for recovery forwarded to NEDA.

Financing options are analyzed, then implementation of the proposed programs & projects are prioritized and roughly planned.

Finally a draft PDNA for each sector is submitted to the OCD for consolidation & inclusion in the overall PDNA & disaster recovery plan and released to the NDRRMC, International Development partners and other stakeholders.

Recovery & reconstruction for Infrastructure

For LGUs infrastructure recovery mainly includes: Urgent temporary repairs of structures to enable resumption of normal operations.

Reconstruction related activities include: Reconstruction and repair of affected structures under a building-back-better strategy

to ensure future disaster resilience. Rebuilding back better partially damaged structures so that they are more resilient to

future disasters. Relocation of the infrastructure to safe areas, as necessary, whether that is on the same

site or on a new building site.

“Reconstruction needs are generally long-term in nature (usually 3 years or more) and are intended to ‘build back better’ from the ruins of a disaster.” (PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

Building back better should progress in tandem with technical assistance for improving construction standards to be more disaster resilient, followed by adopting and enforcement of these improved construction standards.

Strengthening of construction standards should be planned for & executed by the DILG as a longer term project.

Page 357: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xi REV 1.0

Due to the longer term nature of reconstruction activities, needs will typically be prioritized based on urgency and available resources.

Needs will then be split into a rough annual schedule of implementation. A table similar to the one below will be used by agencies like NEDA & DBM to plan funding.

Summary of recovery and reconstruction needs Needs Annual Needed Amount of Assistance (PhP) Total

Disaster Year

Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 and beyond

(PhP)

Recovery Needs 1. Urgent repairs

of structures

Total Reconstruction Needs

1. Reconstruction of structures

2. Rebuild back better

3. Relocation (on site or to a new site)

Total GRAND TOTAL

(PDRF, Deltares, NUS, Feb 2013)

Page 358: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xii REV 1.0

Appendix C. Local Infrastructure Audit Form and Instructional guide for Buildings

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Appendix D. JICA references

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Appendix E. Structural Frame Design Calculations

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Page 359: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xiii REV 1.0

Appendix F. Bolted Connection Design Calculations

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Appendix G. Ramp Design Calculations

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Appendix H. Assure Drawings

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Appendix I. NHA Drawings

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Page 360: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xiv REV 1.0

Appendix J. Example Detailed Estimate

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Appendix K. Example Testing Requirements and Specifications

Refer to USB for Electronic File

Page 361: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xv REV 1.0

Appendix L. Risk Management in Construction

Q: What is risk?

A: Risk is an event or situation that could have an unintended result or outcome. The result could be deemed either a positive or negative.

Q: What is risk management?

A: Risk management considers the impact a risk can have and the likelihood of this occurring.

Risk management is planning and implementing actions to anticipate and control risk

Maybe you have come across the term ‘risk’ as it applies to vulnerability and exposure to natural hazards, however this focus on what are the events or situations that could impact on the implementation of projects.

It might help to think about it with the Quality triangle (time, cost, scope) impacts. What is it that we are trying to achieve, and what issues or problems can we anticipate?

Page 362: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xvi REV 1.0

•�10

3�•�

��

��

FIN

AL�D

RAFT�

�� � Id

entif

y�th

e�po

ssib

le�ri

sks�

Risk�R

anki

ng�

L/M

/H/E

x�

Wha

t�are�w

e�al

read

y�do

ing�

abou

t�it?�

Wha

t�mor

e�ca

n�w

e�do

�ab

out�i

t?�

Tim

e�sc

ale�

Pers

on�

Resp

onsib

le�

New

�Risk

�Rat

ing�

L/M

/H/E

x�

RISK

�MAN

AGEM

ENT�

PLAN

Proj

ect�

Bara

ngay�

LGU�

Fund

Desc

riptio

n�of�w

orks�

Revi

ew�

Miti

gate�

Asse

ss�

Iden

tify�

Page 363: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xvii REV 1.0

As part of the RAY Batch 2 projects, a number of implementation challenges and possible options in response were discussed at the Region IVB, VI and VIII workshops. They are included here for reference.

Identify issue that could impact on the implementation

What actions could we implement to improve the schedule?

Access difficult during rainy season (rough seas, closed roads, etc)

Pre-order materials Book suitable size transport early before rainy season is

due to commence

Skilled work force not available Coordination of work into clusters (either in a geographic area, or by structure/ rehabilitation type)

Consider specialized training that move around for each structure type (ie excavation specialist, concrete, steel)

Some elements not available locally

Special order for materials Variation to POW

Engineering office not resourced to adequately supervise the sites

Have you included in your POW an allowance for professional services to supervise the works? (can this be done)

Access to the sites/ relocation of community building users

Provide advance of works, consultation with barangay, consider staggering projects over time for relocation

Page 364: BBB Operations Manual Rev1.0

BBB OPERATIONS MANUAL APPENDIX PAGE xviii REV 1.0

In acknowledgement of your active participation and to thank you for engaging and committing to the BBB principles, we (the AVIDs) would like to leave you with…

I've been around the world a couple of times, or maybe more, I've seen the sights, I've had delights on every foreign shore,

but when my mates all ask me the place that I adore, I tell them right away.

Give me a home among the gum trees,

with lots of plum trees, a sheep or two, a ka-kangaroo. A clothes line out the back, verandah out the front,

and an old rocking chair.

You can see me in the kitchen cooking up a roast, or Vegemite on toast, just you and me, a cup of tea.

And later on we'll settle down and mull up on the porch, and watch the possums play.

Give me a home among the gum trees,

with lots of plum trees, a sheep or two, a ka-kangaroo. A clothes line out the back, verandah out the front,

and an old rocking chair.

There's a Safeway up the corner, and a Wooly’s down the street, a brand new place theyve opened up where they regulate the heat,

but I'd trade them all tomorrow for a simple bush retreat where the kookaburras call.

Give me a home among the gum trees,

with lots of plum trees, a sheep or two, a ka-kangaroo. A clothes line out the back, verandah out the front,

and an old rocking chair.

Some people like their houses with fences all around, others live in mansions, and some beneath the ground.

But Me, I like the bush, you know with rabbits running 'round, and a pumpkin vine out the back.

Give me a home among the gum trees,

with lots of plum trees, a sheep or two, a ka-kangaroo. A clothes line out the back, verandah out the front,

and an old rocking chair.

Give me a home among the gum trees, with lots of plum trees, a sheep or two, a ka-kangaroo.

A clothes line out the back, verandah out the front, and an old rocking chair.